UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF STATE OVERSEAS BUILDINGS ... · UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF STATE OVERSEAS BUILDINGS OPERATIONS NEW EMBASSY COMPOUND, BAGHDAD, IRAQ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF STATE OVERSEAS BUILDINGS OPERATIONS NEW EMBASSY COMPOUND, BAGHDAD, IRAQ

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Other general provisions of the Contract, including FAR clauses by reference or as amended in Contract Sections B through J, and other Division 1 sections of these Contract Specifications apply to requirements of this Section; this Section in turn applies to the Contract Drawings and to Specification Divisions 2 through 16 to be developed by the Contractor.

B. Refer to Contract Section C for information related to government-furnished equipment.

C. Refer to Contract Section H for information related to USG federal holidays.

D. Refer to Section 01141, Construction Security, for information related to general security requirements applicable to project construction.

E. Refer to Section 01321, Project Progress Documentation, for information related to staff qualifications of scheduling personnel and requirements to prepare and maintain an integrated project execution schedule.

F. Refer to Section 01331, Construction Submittals, for information related to submittal of coordination drawings, field engineering submittals, and other construction submittals.

G. Refer to Section 01401, Contractor’s Quality Control, for information related to requirements for the Contractor’s Quality Control program and staff qualifications of quality control personnel.

H. Refer to Section 01501, Temporary Facilities and Controls, for information related to temporary facilities required to support the construction effort and security requirements applicable to temporary facilities.

I. Refer to Section 01521, Construction Safety and Occupational Health, for information related to requirements for safety and occupational health at the Project Site and staff qualifications of safety personnel.

J. Refer to Section 01651, Product Procurement and Shipment, for information related to shipment, handling, and storage of all materials on the Project Site, both secure and non-secure.

K. Refer to Section 01811, Start-up and Commissioning, for information related to staff qualifications of commissioning authority.

L. Refer to Attachment “A”, this Section, for a sample Submittal Register format.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies field engineering, administrative, supervisory, and control requirements to be complied with in support of construction execution and coordination activities by Contractor. In general, the Contractor shall be responsible for total integration of effort and control of the works. The Contractor shall implement an automated project execution control system adequate for planning, monitoring, coordinating, and controlling the works.

B. Further, this Section identifies and describes constraints regarding Contractor’s use of the project site, times of operations, and protection and cleaning of facilities during construction execution. It also provides information related to coordination between the Contractor and the USG on technical security requirements and government-furnish


items. Finally, coordination requirements are included for cutting and patching, as may be indicated on the Construction Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 30 days prior to site mobilization, submit to the Project Director/COR project organization charts depicting principal staff assignments and contact information. Organization charts shall include key administrative and supervisory staff. Copies shall be posted in accordance with Project Director’s/COR’s instructions and shall be updated no less than monthly.

B. Submit resumes of principal staff identified on the organizational chart.

C. Submit documentation confirming staff qualifications to perform the work where such documentation is required by referenced standards.

D. Submit field engineering documentation as described in detail below.

E. Prepare and submit coordination drawings in accordance with procedures described in Section 01331, Construction Submittals, for submittal of shop drawings.

F. Within 30 days prior to mobilization, Contractor shall prepare a list of entities anticipated to perform work at the Project Site within a ninety (90) day look-ahead timeframe. At thirty (30) day intervals thereafter, the Contractor shall update and resubmit this listing to the Project Director/COR. This periodic update process shall continue through the end of the project. The window of consideration for each update shall be a ninety (90) day look-ahead from the time of the submittal.

G. Maintain and submit Submittal Register for review at weekly construction coordination meetings.

1.4 COORDINATION OF TERMINOLOGY

Equivalent Terms: In recognition of differences in terminology used by the US Government (USG) and industry, the following is a partial listing of approximately equivalent terms and acronyms which may be found in these Contract Documents and in manufacturer's product data, industry standards, governing regulations, reports, and similar documents, and particularly in certain sections of Divisions 2 through 16. Refer other terminology coordination questions to Project Director/COR for determination of equivalency. The use of one of the following terms in lieu of the other implies no substantive difference in meaning:


Private Industry Term Equivalent US Government Term

1. Agreement Design, Design/Build, or Construction Contract 2. Application for Payment Request for Progress Payment 3. Architect, and/or Engineer Design/Build A/E (A/E)

4. Bid/Tender, and Bid Price Proposal, and Proposal Price 5. Bidder Offeror 6. Bidding Documents Solicitation and Proposed Contract Documents 7. Drawings Contract Drawings 8. Instructions to Bidders Solicitation Provisions, and Instructions to Offerors 9. Invitation for Bids Request for Proposals 10. General Conditions (GC) Contract Clauses and Conditions 11. Guarantee Period Correction Period 12. Owner US Government or USG 13. Owner's Representative(s) Project Director as the Contracting Officer’s Technical

Representative (COR), either in the US or on the Project Site. When deployed to the Project Site, the COR is provided with an assistant to liaison in the US, called the Assistant Contracting Officer’s Representative or ACOR

14. Project Representative Project Director 16. Resident Engineer Project Director 17. Schedule of Values Detailed Estimate for Progress Payments. This is established

by the Contractor’s cost and resource-loaded project execution schedule

18. Specifications Contract Specifications 19. Supplementary Conditions Supplementary Clauses and Conditions 15. Punch List Schedule of Defects

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Contract Glossary for definitions of all contract-related terms, and specifically, Directed, Furnish, Install, Installer, Experienced Installer, Specialist, Project Site, Provide, and Testing Laboratory.

B. For all terms not understood, the Contractor shall request immediate clarification.

C. The Contract Drawings are recognized as being graphic and diagrammatic in nature, and not definitive on terminology of requirements shown.

1.6 GENERAL EXPLANATIONS

A. Specification Format: These Contract Specifications are organized, titled, and numbered in relation to 16-Division Format, as prepared and maintained by the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). Portions of certain sections may have been edited from nationally recognized master specification systems, and this may influence their internal organization and terminology in certain respects, which will be held to have no significant technical bearing on either the meaning of specification content or Contract Document requirements.

1. Abbreviated language, where used, may imply additional words, and these will be interpreted to be included where appropriate and as applicable. Where required for proper context in Contract Document interpretations, singular words will be held to be plural and plural words will be held to be singular.


2. Imperative language is used to describe work to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in Contract Documents, subjective language is used to describe either responsibility to be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, as noted, or by others.

3. The colon (:) is used, in each related context, to indicate "means," "shall be," "is defined as," or similar implied terminology for abbreviated texts hereof.

B. Minimums/Maximums: Except as otherwise specifically noted, the level of quality and quantity indicated is, in every case, the minimum for work to be provided and performed; refer questionable instances of applicability to Project Director/COR for clarification. The work as performed may either comply exactly with minimums or maximums as indicated, within specified or industry-accepted tolerances, or may exceed minimums or fall below maximums within reasonable limits, as acceptable to Project Director/COR. In general, maximum numeric values for performance of the work are so noted, except where context of requirement implies this qualification.

1. Conflicting Values: Where seemingly conflicting values have been indicated (e.g., where compliance with an imposed standard conflicts with drawing dimensions), refer any perceived conflict to the Project Director/COR for resolution. In general, the most explicitly indicated value will govern, except that the Project Director/COR has the authority to require compliance with the most stringent requirement where determined to be necessary for adequate fulfillment of intention of Contract Documents. Where conflicting requirements in Contract Documents imply two qualities or quantities of substantially equal value (e.g., where two different colors are indicated by related documents for same element of work), refer resolution of selection question to the Project Director/COR.

2. Refer questions of maximums vs. minimums, or of conflicting values in the Contract Documents to the Project Director/COR.

C. Graphic Symbols: In general, graphic symbols included with Contract Documents, including those shown on Contract Drawings, either are defined thereon or are those symbols recognized in construction industry for purposes inferred by context. Where not otherwise defined, consult industry-standardized symbolization publications, as sponsored by trade associations related to instances of usage, including AIA (e.g., Architectural Graphic Standards published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc.), ASHRAE, ASME, ASPE, IEEE, ANSI, Federal USG Agencies/Departments, and other recognized consensus interests of construction industry.

1.7 STAFF REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall provide an adequate professional administrative and supervisory staff in all aspects of the work. This key staff shall be fully coordinated and provide a professional level of project execution management.

B. Principal staff assignments shall be depicted on a project organization chart which shall be submitted and updated as described above. Resumes of key staff shall be submitted with the organization chart. The organization chart shall depict how management, supervisory, and administrative functions will be performed by the Contractor. Where applicable, indicate where multiple tasks will be performed by the same individual.


C. As a minimum, provide the key field staff described below.

1. Contractor shall provide a Project Manager with a minimum of 5 years professional employment record of demonstrated performance in comparable work. Project Manager shall have experience in all aspects of design/build contract execution. Project Manager shall be supported by qualified construction management, field engineering, and project controls staff and administrative support as necessary.

2. Provide superintendents and other supplemental staff as described in the Contract Documents or as necessary to perform the work within the timelines and quality standards specified. Superintendent staff shall demonstrate knowledge, skill, and experience with U.S. construction methods, techniques, and standards. Resumes of superintendent staff shall indicate area of practice, such as, civil, structural, mechanical, electrical, materials, finishes, etc.

3. See Section 01321, Project Progress Documentation, for details on qualifications of scheduling personnel.

4. See Section 01401, Contractor’s Quality Control, for details related to minimum qualifications and staffing to support Contractor’s Quality Control program.

5. See Section 01521, Construction Safety and Occupational Health, for minimum qualifications of Safety and Health Program Manager and medical support staff as applicable. The Safety and Health Program Manager shall not have other duties on the project site.

6. See Section 01811, Start-Up and Commissioning, for details on qualifications of Commissioning Authority and additional resources to support the commissioning process.

D. Each entity engaged for performance of work, including product manufacturing, handling materials/products, fabricating, installing, working to dimension, finishing, testing, and similar operations, is required to be familiar with referenced standards applicable to that entity's operations.

E. As applicable for engagement of entities to perform work which is subject to referenced standards, staff performing the work shall be qualified as documented by certifications, licenses, permits, test reports, judgments, and similar documentation.

F. Ensure each trades-person is skilled, experienced, and properly equipped to produce the required quality of the works.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PROJECT SITE

A. Except as otherwise indicated, the Contractor is granted full use of Project Site and shall develop a plan for site utilization during the construction period.

1. Boundaries of Project Site. See appropriate attachment at Contract Section J. 2. All work performed at the Project Site shall be conducted in accordance with

applicable security requirements specified in Sections 01141, 01501, and 01651. 3. On-Site Waste Disposal. Contractor disposal or burial of inert waste as fill

materials on-site shall not be permitted. On-site disposal by burial/burning of organic and hazardous materials shall not be permitted.

4. Protection of Existing Plantings. Protect existing trees and other plantings on Project Site during construction. Removal of vegetation shall be done only with


prior consent of the Project Director/COR. Do not allow construction traffic or storage of materials inside the drip lines of existing trees. Re-establish existing lawns following general completion of construction. Requirements of this paragraph shall be performed in accordance with sitework and landscape requirements.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate the allocation of available work and storage areas equitably among all entities to integrate and maximize the execution of the work. Coordination include the site use requirements of the Contractor, its subcontractors, the USG, and any subcontractors under the USG.

1. Prepare and provide site utilization plan showing how temporary facilities will be distributed and constructed on Project Site; indicate paved parking, work areas, sheds, and similar elements. Refer to Section 01501, Temporary Facilities and Controls, and Section 01521, Construction Safety and Occupational Health.

2. All temporary facilities shall maximize effectiveness and efficiency, conserving energy and water, and carefully integrating drainage capacity.

3. All entities performing the work shall have adequate access to temporary facilities. The Contractor shall ensure utilization is optimized.

4. Deliveries shall be scheduled to the Project Site using “Just-in-Time” (JIT) procedures to minimize long-term storage at the Project Site.

5. The Contractor shall ensure that surplus, waste, and rejected material is promptly removed from the Project Site. The Contractor shall ensure that the Project Site is not to be used for the sale of such material, as specifically identified under appropriate contract clauses for disposal.

6. The Contractor shall comply with regulations of local governing authorities in so far as they do not conflict with the above. Questions and issues shall be forwarded to the Project Director/COR as soon as they are known.

C. Protection of Adjacent Properties. Provide temporary protective measures to prevent damage to adjacent properties. Contractor shall be responsible for repairing any damage to adjacent properties as a result of its activities on the construction Project Site.

D. By written report within twenty-four (24) hours of each occurrence, the Contractor shall transmit to the Project Director/COR notice of any and all unusual events and discoveries at the Project Site. These include unexpected weather phenomena, exceptional visitors, unusual encounters during excavation, and similar occurrences.

1. During excavating work, the Contractor shall notify the Project Director/COR promptly upon encountering significant elements of geological, historic, archaeological, or other similar interests. Such elements may protected by local law and do not belong to the Contractor. These elements shall be protected and preserved until disposition directions are received from the Project Director/COR.

E. The Project Director/COR will notify the Contractor of all USG and local government ceremonies planned and scheduled at the Project Site. The Contractor shall coordinate and curtail construction activities as requested so as to neither interfere with nor endanger participants.

F. The USG reserves the right to place and install equipment as necessary in completed areas of the building and to occupy such completed areas prior to substantial completion, provided that such occupancy does not substantially interfere with completion of the


work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's works entire or in part.

1.9 PROJECT SITE HOURS OF OPERATIONS

A. Hours of Operations. Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, work shall be performed only during the work days and hours specified below.

1. Contractor’s Workweek. a) Contractor may plan execution of the works based on a 7-day workweek.

Contractor shall validate the days of the workweek in terms of local, national, and religious customs. Contractor shall become familiar with local customs and shall ensure all project execution actions are in accordance with same.

b) Should the Contract Documents be in error regarding local workweek customs, the Contractor shall bring same to the attention of the Project Director/COR in writing. Relative contract documents will then be amended without compensation.

c) While work may proceed on the days of the week as specified, the Contractor shall validate local labor laws and customs which may restrict total allowable hours worked within a given week. Crew planning shall be adjusted accordingly.

d) The Project Director/COR will be responsible for all USG staff coverage of the works. The Contractor shall coordinate its workweek execution plan and obtain Project Director/COR acceptance.

2. Contractor’s Working Hours per Day. Because of the tight construction, period contractor is allowed to work 24/7 if he chooses to do so. Contractor shall coordinate all work with the PD/COR at site, so that proper surveillance can be provided.

B. Contractor Charges, USG Support Staff (Overtime).

The Contractor shall give the Project Director/COR 90 days advance notice of the initial need for CAGs and CSTs. He shall also provide a 90-day projection of project overtime to allow the Project Director/COR to plan for additional CAG and CST mobilizations.

C. Contractor Charges, USG Support Staff (Coordination Error). The Contractor shall be similarly liable for USG support staff charges when, per contract conditions, an inspection is requested, USG staff is ready to execute said inspection, and the Contractor designates the works not to be ready.

D. Designated Holidays (TBD).

Contractor shall prepare a list of holidays and forward it to PD/COR at site. E. Excepted Operations.

Contractor shall prepare a list of holidays and forward it to the PD/COR at site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INTEGRATED PROJECT PLANNING, EXECUTION, AND CONTROLS

A. Contractor shall coordinate and integrate design and construction operations to effect optimized total performance. Contractor shall in all instances seek to optimize the execution of the works, minimizing delays, and eliminating disruptions to the greatest extent possible.

B. Contractor shall define all elements required to execute the project work. Utilize a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) or similar planning tool to organize the work elements into logical sequences of events.

C. Contractor shall utilize an automated project execution control system for project planning and controls. This system shall be used as a tracking tool for all work elements and shall be available to the USG for validation.

D. Contractor shall sequence work for adequate attachment, support, and protection of each installation; for compliance with USG design and installation work; and for compliance with USG security requirements. Do not block off access required for installation of other elements, and do not cover work where access is still required for inspection or testing.

E. Contractor shall prepare integrated project execution schedule as specified in Section 01321, Project Progress Documentation, to provide a database, logical interdependency, and graphic depiction of the integrated coordination and control effort to be effected.

F. Contractor shall review all Contract Documents and project requirements and generate a complete list of deliverables to be transmitted as submittals. The Contractor shall ensure all deliverables are considered in the project execution plan and are entered, coded, and tracked in the automated project execution control system.

G. Contractor shall generate from the automated project execution control system an integrated, consolidated submittal register (see sample hard copy output at Attachment “A”). Submittal register shall be updated and submitted periodically. These reports shall become a part of the final project record set.

H. Contractor shall expedite and transmit all submittals in accordance with Section 01331, Construction Submittals. Plan, coordinate, and optimize all submittal acceptance processes, from the initial transmittal through installation and acceptance of the works. Contractor shall seek to normalize all submittals and to eliminate duplicative actions.

I. Contractor shall generate from the automated project execution control system a material tracking schedule and shipping log. These reports shall be updated and submitted periodically for review at construction coordination meetings as described below. These reports shall become a part of the final project record set.

J. Payment applications shall be prepared based on the schedule of values generated from the automated project execution control system. Payment applications shall be coordinated with inspections, certifications, and similar actions and shall be submitted subsequent to completion of specified prerequisite work elements for which partial payment has been requested.

3.2 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION EXECUTION

A. Contractor shall coordinate all phases and aspects of the works carefully to achieve intended results, including best overall visual effect for all exposed work, regardless of


trade or material. Remove and replace workmanship that is found to be not in compliance.

B. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following general requirements for installation and coordination of work:

1. Require each installer to inspect substrates to receive work and conditions under which installation will be made, and to report unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Recheck measurements before proceeding.

2. Inspect delivered materials, fabrications, and equipment prior to installation, and reject damaged or defective items.

3. Install each element of project only during weather conditions that will contribute to successful workmanship and allow for proper curing, protection, and concealment.

4. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for each installation. 5. Isolate each element of work from contact with incompatible work. 6. Coordinate concealment, enclosing, or covering over of work with requirements

for inspection or testing to avoid necessity for uncovering completed work. 7. Where mounting height for any element of the work is not shown, mount at

industry-recommended standard height for application indicated. 8. Secure or anchor each element of the work to its supporting substrate as

indicated; if not otherwise indicated, secure or anchor as recommended by manufacturer or in compliance with applicable trade association standard.

C. In all aspects of the work, fully comply with construction safety and occupational health requirements as specified in Section 01521, Construction Safety and Occupational Health.

D. Technical Security Systems (TSS)

1. The Contractor shall be fully cognizant of its responsibilities as relates to the design, shipping, storage, installation, testing, and certification of the project’s TSS work. The specific responsibilities of the Contractor, the USG, general and specialty subcontractors and installers may be defined elsewhere in these Contract Documents, e.g., the delivery and installation of TSS support infrastructure, conduit runs, standards (poles), etc.

2. Should the Contractor fail to plan for and effect an integrated solution to the sensitive nature of project TSS works, in the determination of the USG, it shall be without delay claim basis.

E. In execution of the works, Contractor shall schedule and perform Quality Control services as specified in Section 01400-series specifications.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for all material lay out areas, both prime and subcontract, so as to ensure the safety of all staff, employees, and visitors to the Project Site and security for the materials contained therein.

G. Contractor shall adhere to the requirements of Section 01651, Product Handling and Shipment, in the shipment, handling, and storage of all materials on the Project Site, with respect to both secure and non-secure products.

H. Compatibility of products in relation to interfacing work is basic requirement of each product selection. Where product options are open for Contractor's selection, that


selection must be compatible with interfacing products. Where products interface, coordinate selections for compatibility prior to procurement of any of these products and without regard for sequence of each product's installation. Advise Project Director/COR of compatibility problems that cannot be reconciled. Product non-compatibility that results from Contractor’s incorrect selection from options is not an allowable basis for change order or Contract Modification. Coordinate selections, through Project Director/COR, with products already selected and procured under separate contracts or by the USG; request information on such products.

I. The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials delivered and work performed until completion of the works and final acceptance by the USG as defined herein, except for any completed unit of work which may have been previously accepted under the contract.

3.3 COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. Pre-Construction Conference. The Project Director/COR shall conduct an initial construction conference on or near the date of NTP – Construction and within thirty (30) calendar days prior to Contractor’s mobilization to the Project Site. Attendees at this meeting shall include the Project Director/COR and a representative from each contract entity, including separate contractors, both USG and Contractor, executing the work during first quarter of scheduled construction period. Agenda items shall include a review of the general plans, conditions, procedures, and requirements as shall be necessary for the effective scheduling and prosecution of the construction work. Further, all parties shall review security and material delivery requirements, personnel assigned, and contract communication procedures as have been established for the Project. Where and when feasible, this meeting shall be scheduled and conducted at the Project Site. If not feasible, this meeting shall be scheduled and conducted at a location selected for the greatest convenience of the majority of attendees.

B. Construction Coordination Meetings. The Contractor and Project Director/COR will hold weekly construction coordination meetings to discuss schedule and status of outstanding issues. Weekly coordination meetings shall commence immediately upon mobilization to the Project Site.

1. Construction coordination meetings are intended to promote a full exchange of information between the USG and the Contractor, promote open and honest discussion between parties, and identify areas of concern by each party. All parties shall seek the expeditious resolution of issues before they become problems.

2. The weekly construction coordination meeting may have an agenda as follows: a) Submittal Register

Contractor shall review and brief the current status of design and construction submittals: · Completed and retired. · Not yet delivered and late, by aging period. · Due near-term (within thirty (30) calendar days, early start). · Due mid-term (within thirty (30) to sixty (60) calendar days, early

start). · Those on or approaching critical path status (less than fifteen (15)

calendar days of float).


Review outstanding submittal register, identify any outstanding submittals that may impact the schedule, and agree to course of action for expediting these submittals.

b) Project Execution Schedule Progress of the work shall be reviewed. Contractor shall revise, balance, and submit an updated project execution schedule in accordance with Section 01321, Project Progress Documentation. This review shall be based upon a subset report of the Project Execution Schedule in which all project execution activities have been entered. This review shall include: · Status of continuing activities. · New activity starts since last meeting. · Activities planned to start within 30, 60, and 90 day look-ahead

periods. · Activity planned completion dates. · Activity interruptions. · Activity completions.

Activity interruptions should include the reason for the interruption. An activity will be considered complete when only punch list items remain that can be completed at a later date without impacting another dependent activity.

c) Visitors Review list of scheduled visitors for both the Contractor and OBO and the reason for the visit.

d) Quality Control Review outstanding issues and agreed to dispositions.

e) Safety Review outstanding issues and agreed to dispositions.

f) Security Review outstanding issues and agreed to dispositions.

g) Requests For Information (RFI) Review the project RFI log; identify outstanding RFI's that may impact the schedule and agree to a course of action to expedite resolution.

h) Change Orders Review the log of outstanding change orders; expedite the completion of change orders.

i) Correspondence Review correspondence between Project Director/COR and Contractor to ensure all written letters were received and there is no misunderstanding of the content or intent of the correspondence.

j) Material Tracking Schedule and Shipping Log Review the project-shipping log to ensure expeditious processing of shipping documents from point of origin, through shipping services, through the local Ministry of Foreign Affairs or equivalent. Identify


shipments that may adversely impact the project execution schedule. Develop, agree upon, and execute remedial courses of action, as necessary.

3. Meeting Minutes. The Contractor shall provide meeting minutes in agenda format to the Project Director/COR the next working day after each construction coordination meeting. The Project Director/COR will sign the meeting minutes upon agreeing to their accuracy. Final meeting minutes signed by the Project Director/COR and the Contractor will be distributed by the Project Director/COR no later than two working days after the coordination meeting and shall become part of the final project record set.

C. Safety Meetings. In accordance with requirements of Section 01521, Construction Safety and Occupational Health, regular meetings shall be conducted and documented covering construction safety and occupational health-related subjects. These meetings include “tool box” safety meetings and meetings of the Joint Safety and Health Committee.

D. QC Meetings. In accordance with requirements of Section 01401, Contractor’s Quality Control, weekly meetings shall be conducted and documented covering on-going quality-related matters.

E. Pre-Installation Meetings. The Project Director/COR shall call and conduct coordination meeting(s) as necessary prior to the beginning of major installations requiring the interfacing of work by different entities, including separate contractors. This meeting shall be scheduled in such a manner that it shall produce the most effective work coordination. As applicable, attendees at these meetings shall include representatives of manufacturer or fabricator of the major components to be installed. These meetings effect coordination of the work; costs shall be borne by the Contractor.

3.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination or clarification drawing sets shall be prepared as necessary to show interfacing between various building systems. These drawings shall be prepared at a scale sufficient to show how actual dimensions and shapes of separate elements will relate in the space, but not less than 1:25. Composite drawings shall be prepared as necessary. These shall include plans, elevations, and sections at crucial locations.

B. The Contractor shall take special care to coordinate and produce drawings that show the actual location and sizes for sleeves, inserts, and similar devices to be placed in concrete and other work. The Contractor shall carefully assess the need for and expedite the timely preparation of these drawings, lest the construction execution sequence be adversely affected.

3.5 GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED ITEMS

A. As delineated in Contract Section C, in some cases USG will provide equipment or material for either USG installation or Contractor installation, designated as GFGI and GFCI, respectively.

B. In all cases the Contractor shall coordinate with the USG and plan to accommodate these items during the design, receiving, transportation, secure shipment and storage, material handling, and for integration of the installation of same into the general works.

C. In some instances the USG will elect or be required to execute transport and storage of selected items, systems and materiel. The Contractor shall ensure it maintains complete


status information regarding these items. Failure to maintain said status shall not be used in justification as grounds for contract delay.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for supporting infrastructure for government-furnished items. As an example, if the USG is to provide and install an alarm system, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and install conduits, raceways, cables, terminal boxes, and source power. For security alarm systems, these shall be as specified in the Technical Security System (TSS) drawing package. For other systems, the Contractor shall execute due diligence in obtaining information, catalog cuts, etc., from the USG and others so as to deliver the requisite infrastructure. The USG will be responsible for making terminations and installing and testing the end items.

1. Contractor may be required to provide and install TSS rough-in and installation materials.

2. Contractor shall coordinate, integrate with, and, as required, assist, the USG and the USG subcontractors for the effective installation, termination, overall testing, modification, and adjustment to TSS.

E. Government-Furnished Furniture (GFCI)

1. USG will design, specify, procure, and track said materiel to a designated receiving point in Kuwait.

2. Contractor shall receive and inventory said materiel and report receipt and any discrepancies in product, quantity, finish, fabric, hardware, etc., or damages within twenty-four (24) hours of delivery.

3. USG will provide a project record book with photographs or illustrations and samples keyed to floor plans and purchase order documents.

4. Contractor shall store, consolidate, containerize, ship, clear, install, inspect, performance test, make and complete deficiency (punch) lists, and revise as-built/as-installed drawings.

5. Contractor shall be responsible for supporting infrastructure and for making terminations.

6. Contractor shall itemize, consolidate, mark and report uninstalled inventory and arrange for transfer to post responsibility.

F. Subsequent to Contract award, for each element of work that is to be performed by the USG as GFGI, the USG will prepare definitive procurement and shipment data for Contractor's information. The Contractor shall integrate this information into its project execution plan and incorporate same as elements in the automated project execution control system.

G. Contractor shall review, understand, and request clarification of these specifications if necessary to ensure the delivery of complete, operable facilities at the level of quality agreed upon.

3.6 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Working from recorded property markers and benchmarks as available and as indicated in Contract Documents, the Contractor shall establish permanent points of locations, lines, and levels. The Contractor shall layout the project in its principal lines and levels as needed for accurate placement of work by each project execution entity, Contractor, separate, and the USG.

1. The Contractor shall calculate and measure within recognized tolerances.


Drawings shall not be scaled to determine dimensions. As work progresses, the Contractor shall record non-corrected deviations from required lines and levels that are demonstrated to be beyond recognized tolerances. The Contractor shall report promptly significant consequences of such deviations to the Project Director/COR.

2. The Contractor shall maintain a surveyor's log of continuing field measurements. 3. For multi-story construction, the Contractor shall provide benchmarks for each

story level. 4. The Contractor shall engage registered land surveyors or professional engineers,

experienced in forms of field engineering required by the project. These individuals shall be licensed and/or registered by local governing authorities for the performance of required field engineering services.

5. The Contractor shall confirm locations and elevations of existing utilities in each area of the Project Site and surrounding the Project Site before the commencement of any excavation or foundation work.

6. The Contractor shall confirm pipe sizes and invert elevations for water or waste-bearing lines and shall record the type of construction, general condition or state of repair, and auxiliary features of such utilities.

7. Each project execution entity is responsible for the correct location, line, and level of its portion of the work in relation with established lines and levels. Each project execution entity is responsible to coordinate adjoining and interfacing work, whether previously or subsequently installed.

B. Field Engineering Submittals. The Contractor shall submit the following in accordance

with submittal procedures described in detail in Section 01331, Construction Submittals.

1. Video Survey. The Contractor shall prepare and submit an instrument survey complete with video capture of all existing site conditions. These may include historic and significant properties and adjacent structures (buildings, roads, utilities). This survey shall include a description and video of the general condition of the historic and significant properties and structures as well as any visible cracking, fitting, or settlement. A sketch plan or elevation will be prepared to clarify the condition.

2. The Contractor shall transmit as a submittal its monitoring plan for historic and significant properties and adjacent structures, including instrumentation selection and point locations. Each monitoring point shall be placed so as to detect and measure the progress of any settlement occurring in the existing historic and significant properties and adjacent structures. The Project Director/COR shall determine whether additional instrumentation and monitoring points shall be required. These shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor at no additional cost to the USG.

3. Instrumentation Reports. After acceptance by the Project Director/COR and prior to the commencement of any excavation work, the Contractor shall install instrumentation at accepted monitoring points. The Contractor shall submit weekly instrument readings from each monitoring point to the Project Director/COR. The Contractor shall maintain a log of the weekly readings as required throughout the duration of the construction execution phase and shall submit same as a deliverable upon project closeout. Refer to Section 02200, Earthwork, for additional monitoring requirements.


4. Surveyor’s Log. Surveyor’s log shall be updated and submitted to the Project Director/COR frequently without request and specially as requested. The surveyor's log shall be a component of the final record document set.

5. Final Property Survey. At substantial completion, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a final property survey. This deliverable shall record location, line, and level of significant features, including real property, as actually constructed upon the Project Site. In this submittal the Contractor shall indicate actual dimensions of perimeter fence and gate facilities in relation to property lines. The Contractor shall include the surveyor's certification to effect that dimensioned lines and levels are true and accurate as shown on the final survey, and that permanent benchmarks and property corner markers are installed, located and labeled as shown.

3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall coordinate and supervise the protection, cleaning, and maintenance work at the Project Site during receipt, handling, storage, installation, curing, and similar stages of construction execution to effect minimum exposure to hazards by personnel and minimum deterioration to the work.

B. Contractor shall comply with applicable manufacturer's instructions, and with requirements of individual work sections of Divisions 2 through 16 hereof.

C. The Contractor shall apply protective coverings where necessary and prudent to ensure that completed work by any entity shall remain undamaged. Protective coverings shall be maintained through to time of substantial completion.

D. The Contractor shall adjust, lubricate, and perform preventive maintenance on all operable components to preclude deterioration beyond normal wear prior to substantial completion. The Contractor shall ensure that all components placed into operation are protected from damage and deleterious effects by improper actions.

E. The Contractor shall limit exposure of work to risks of harm and damage due to excessive loading and pressures, extreme temperatures, humidity, water/ice, solvents/chemicals, puncture, abrasion, heavy traffic, soiling/staining, corrosion, infestation, combustion, contact with incompatible materials, misalignment, and other threats. Refer to Section 01521, Construction Safety and Occupational Health, for additional requirements.

F. Once installed, interiors fixtures and furnishings shall be protected by the Contractor and shall not be subject to dust, debris, trafficking, or other deleterious side effects of the construction process.

3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Definition. Cutting and Patching (C&P) is defined to include the cutting into or removal of existing installations of work on the Project with subsequent patching or replacement of removed work for gaining access to inspect or install other work, or for facilitating alterations or modifications to other work.

B. C&P operations shall be performed where indicated on the Construction Drawings and shall be included in the automated project execution control system.

C. Examination. The Contractor shall evaluate all possible physical reaction(s) from the planned C&P operations, focusing on threatened losses, any inherent dangers, and


extending to possible obvious or hidden exposures to mechanical, electrical, or other utilities in situ.

D. Preparation. Before proceeding with any C&P operations, the Contractor shall initiate all necessary protective provisions. These shall include temporary supports, alternative services, temporary protective coverings or enclosures of adjoining work, the protection of adjacent surfaces, provisions for control of dust (palliation) and spatter, warning signs, and similar provisions. The Contractor shall plan for and enforce provisions to limit cutting only to intended elements and to avoid the unintentional and unauthorized cutting or damaging of elements to be retained as is.

E. Continuity of Service. Great care shall be taken to maintain utility service and security systems during all C&P operations. Where required cutting will necessitate the shutdown or the discontinued use of utility lines or distribution services, provide to the Project Director/COR the scheduled time period for such disruption of service and indicate how temporary services will be provided in order to sustain necessary operations. In all cases, emergency automatically-switched stand-by power to selected areas shall be provided at the highest performance level and security systems shall not be compromised.

F. General Cutting Procedures.

1. The Contractor shall execute C&P operations utilizing methods and tools that are least likely to damage facilities and elements to be retained. In general, the Contractor shall consider using small-scale, low-powered, hand-operated, low-impact, "cutting" type tools.

2. The Contractor shall produce neat, uniform, and accurate cutouts in compliance with the Construction Drawings, and shall provide protection and execute the cutting work to avoid marring adjacent and adjoining surfaces.

3. The Contractor shall clean each cutout of loosened materials, dust, and debris. 4. Where necessary, the Contractor shall cover all cut out areas to avoid exposure to

weather and other contaminants prior to patching.

G. General Patching Procedures.

1. The Contractor shall install suitable anchors or bond coat as shall be effective in securing permanence to all patches.

2. The Contractor shall patch with joint bonds or seams at retained material. These shall be durable, tight, and as nearly invisible as possible.

3. The Contractor shall install and work all surfaces of exposed patches to a precise level and in alignment matching finishes, color, pattern, texture, and durability with surfaces in situ.

END OF SECTION 01101


SUBMITTAL REGISTER/LOG /SCHEDULE

PROJECT, LOCATION, NUMBER: New Office Building Compound Capital Big City, ABC Land XJ-AA1234

Contract Number: S-OBO AD 02 – G-12345 Mods 001 - 010 Report date:

01 January 2009 Page 1 of 23

SUB

MIT

TAL

NU

MB

ER

SPECIFICATION SUBMITTAL CONTRACTOR DATES USG DATES, ACTIONS

SECTION

NUMBER

PARAGRAPH

NUMBER

TYPE DESCRIPTION

SCH

EDU

LED

SU

BM

ISSI

ON

A

CTU

AL

SUB

MIS

SIO

N

AC

CEP

TAN

CE

NEE

DED

B

Y:

MFG

R

WA

RR

AN

TY

EXPI

RA

TIO

N

CO

NTR

AC

TO

R

WA

RR

AN

TY

EXPI

RA

TIO

N SUBMITT

AL REVIEW AGENT

REC

EIV

ED

BY

REV

IEW

A

GEN

T R

ETU

RN

ED

TO P

RO

JEC

T D

IREC

TOR

/ C

OR

R

ETU

RN

ED

TO

CO

NTR

AC

TO

R

STATUS COD

E ON SITE

OTHER

01300 1.2.3.4 DD2 Conformance Design Documents (35%)

01300 1.2.3.5 DD3 Interim Design Documents (60%) 01300 1.2.3.6 DD4 100% Design Documents 01314 1.0.C.1 IPS Initial Project Schedule 01321 1.3.F.2 DPS Detailed Project Schedule 02221 2.1.D.2.

a) SD4 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND

COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES

02511 2.3.C.1 AD1 HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 2.3.C.2 AD3 Aggregate gradations 02511 2.3.F.2 AD3 Asphalt cement 02514 02514 SA3 EXPOSED AGGREGATE

CONCRETE PAVING

02514 02514 PD3 Mix Design 02514 02514 PD3 Material List and Source 02514 02514 SA1 Admixtures and Accessories 02514 02514 SA1 Aggregate 02514 02514 SA5 Reinforcement 02514 02514 SA1 Joint Fillers 02514 02514 SD5 Concrete

NOTES: Sample is provided as a suggested format only. It should be generated by the automated project execution control system. The Contractor is encouraged to modify as needed to create the most effective management tool possible. Type Legend SD = Shop Drawing, AD = Administrative Data, PD = Product Data, and SA = Sample. END OF ATTACHMENT “A” – SECTION 01101 – CONSTRUCTION EXECUTION AND COORDINATION


SECTION 01521 – CONSTRUCTION SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Refer to Section 01501, Temporary Facilities and Controls, for information on materials, equipment, and electrical power related to temporary facilities.

C. Regulations and Standards. Governing regulations and specific technical safety and health requirements for work performed at Project Site and incorporated into this construction safety and occupational health program include the following:

1. Latest edition of U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) Safety and Health Requirements Manual, EM 385-1-1; this document is available at U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington D.C.

2. DOS Foreign Affairs Manual (FAM), Vol. 6, Subchapter 610 "Safety Health and Environmental Management Program" shall apply when and where construction activity impacts on U.S. diplomatic missions and the public.

3. NFPA Code 241, Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.

4. ANSI A10 series standards for Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition.

5. NFPA Code 51B, Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work.

6. NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. 7. Rigging, by James Headley, Crane Institute of America Publishing Company,

Maintland Florida, 2001. 8. 2001 Food Code, Food and Drug Administration, National Technical Information

Service Publication PD2002-100819, or latest edition.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The purpose of this Section is to indicate the nature and scope of Contractor responsibilities for:

1. Construction safety and occupational health for all persons and property at the Project Site.

2. Developing a Construction Accident Prevention Plan (CAPP) for management procedures, operations, training, inspections, assessments and reporting of safety and health matters on site.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.4 Refer to Contract Glossary for definitions of all safety-related terms, and specifically, Designated Authority, Hazard, Activity Hazard Aanlysis, Job Hazard Analysis, Qualified Person, and Confined Space.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Construction Accident Prevention Plan (CAPP).

1. See Attachment "A", Guidelines for Preparation of the Construction Accident Prevention Plan. The Construction Accident Prevention Plan (CAPP) is a safety and health policy and program management document. The CAPP shall be job-specific, and shall address unusual or unique aspects of the Project. The CAPP is based upon USACE EM 385-1-1, where it is referred to as "Accident Prevention Plan (APP)".

2. Before beginning work at the Project Site, submit to Project Director/COR for acceptance, a detailed CAPP indicating means which will be provided to ensure: safe access to work areas, protection/safety/health of persons authorized to be at Project Site, and protection of property on and adjacent to Project Site during all phases of construction. Include in the text of CAPP a certified statement executed by Contractor's representative having broad corporate authority indicating full commitment to accepted CAPP, and level of authority in assignment of responsibilities for implementation at the Project Site. Include specific details for meetings, inspections, and training/instruction of Contractor, subcontractor, and separate contractor employees.

B. Activity and Job Hazard Analysis. Prior to proceeding with performance of work involving unusual construction operations, work practices, or work involving hazardous materials, prepare and submit written analysis to Project Director/COR. Do not proceed with work that has been identified as being potentially hazardous until Project Director/COR has expressed and recorded "no objection" to proposed methods and procedures.

C. Hazardous Materials. Contractor shall bring to immediate attention of Project Director/COR any material suspected of being hazardous which is encountered in demolition or excavation or used during execution of the work. A determination will be made by Project Director/COR as to whether to have tests performed to ascertain whether the material is hazardous; do not proceed with that part of the work until directed by Project Director/COR.

D. Hazardous Work Permits. Contractors and subcontractors shall submit written requests to Project Director/COR for all Hazardous Work Permits. Permits are required whenever construction operations include the following:

1. Hot Work. Includes all work that results in open flame such as welding, cutting, brazing, and burning. The Contractor shall provide effective fire protection and prevention at all times during such operations.

2. Confined Space Entry. As defined above, includes work in enclosed areas such as storage tanks, bins, sewers, in-ground vaults, boilers, vessels, tunnels, manholes, pits, etc.

3. Internal Combustion Engines. The use of trucks, forklifts, pumps, or generators powered by petroleum-based fuel when used inside a building, structure, or confined space.


4. Explosive Actuated Tools. These include powder charged tools manufactured by Hilti, Remington, Ram Set, and others used for fastening purposes.

5. Explosives. Follow all applicable US and local government regulations. In all cases close coordination with controlling officials shall be effected.

E. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Refer to the requirements USACE EM 385-1-1.

F. Minutes of Meetings. Record and submit to Project Director/COR minutes of safety related meetings, including weekly tool box safety meetings and meetings of the Joint Safety and Health Committee as described below.

G. Records of Inspection. All records of inspection shall be made available to the Project Director/COR. Records of inspection shall include documentation of safety, health, and housekeeping inspections and corrective actions and timetables associated with any deficiencies encountered. Documentation shall also be made available for verification that corrective actions were implemented.

H. Accident Investigation and Reporting. Investigate and submit separate accident report on each accident resulting in lost time, disabling/fatal injuries, or damage to vehicles, property, materials, supplies, or to furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

1. Prepare reports on forms supplied by and in accordance with instructions of Project Director/COR. Include in each report Contractor's recommendations and statement of actions taken to prevent recurrence of accident. Submit report of each accident with 24 hours of accident or mishap, except as otherwise indicated by requirements or governing regulations.

2. Except as may be otherwise requested by Project Director/COR during time of contract, report major accidents and mishaps on Form (3-92) DS-1663, related instruction sheet available from the Project Director/COR.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. General. Continue management and implementation of safety and health program through time of construction. Comply with conditions existing and developing at Project Site, and with requests of Project Director/COR. Acceptance by Project Director/COR will not relieve the Contractor of overall responsibility for compliance with the strict interpretation of all safety and health requirements of the Contract.

B. The Project Director/COR reserves the right to suspend work when and where the Contractor's safety and health program is considered to be operating in an inadequate manner, has severe shortcomings, or is not in compliance. This shall include failures to complete required submittals within the time periods specified.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Materials, equipment, and workmanship for temporary facilities described in this Section shall be provided and performed in accordance with requirements in Section 01501, Temporary Facilities and Controls.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION OF CONSTRUCTION ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN

A. Management and Corporate Commitment. Implementation and management of accepted CAPP shall have full cooperation and support of management at the broad, corporate level. Full cooperation and support shall be expressed by written statement executed by a senior officer of the construction contracting firm/corporation, included with the CAPP as described in this Section.

B. Safety and Health Rules. The Contractor shall establish and enforce clearly written, definitive rules to be followed by employees of Contractor, subcontractors, and separate contractors at Project Site, applicable for performance of each unit of work. Prominently post notices in English, the host national language, and third country languages, if appropriate, stating that failure to comply with safety and health rules may cause immediate termination of employment. Post safety and health rules at the Project Site and provide a copy to each subcontractor prior to the commencement of work.

C. Emergency Resources. The Contractor shall establish, jointly with OBO, a listing of telephone numbers and location of ambulance, physician, hospital, fire, police, and other sources of emergency assistance. This information shall be conspicuously posted in several locations on Project Site.

D. Emergency Communication. Wireless telephone service shall be the preferred method of emergency communications. Emergency communication access shall be available to site medical personnel and nearby medical clinic or hospital.

E. Emergency Plans. The Contractor shall establish, jointly with the Project Director/COR and OBO Site Security Manager, plans to ensure safety of all persons at Project Site in the event of fire or other emergency, and review with all effected employees. Emergency plans shall be tested quarterly using drills to ascertain and ensure their effectiveness. Testing of emergency plans shall be conducted jointly by USG and Contractor staff.

1. Plans shall include: Escape procedures and routes, method of accounting for employees following emergency evacuation, identification of source and location for rescue and medical assistance, means of reporting emergencies, and persons to be contacted for information or clarification.

2. Planning for Project shall include total system response capabilities to minimize consequences of accidents, natural disasters, or other emergencies.

3. On-site emergency planning shall be integrated with off-site emergency support. 4. The number of persons permitted in any location shall be limited to rescue and

escape capability, as determined by Contractor and in concurrence with Project Director/COR.

F. Emergency alert systems shall be identified, selected, installed, and tested to alert all persons likely to be affected by existing or imminent disaster conditions, and to alert and summon personnel and equipment comprising emergency response capability.

G. General Orientation. Contractor to provide orientation for new employees regarding safety and health policies, and work rules.

H. Specific Training.

1. Provide specific training to supervisory personnel and all craft workers of the Contractor and subcontractors in proper use and care of specific personal protective gear, equipment, and clothing.


2. Contractor and subcontractor employees shall be trained and supervised by qualified persons to perform, safely and confidently, recognized hazardous work operations and work performed with hazardous conditions to which they have been assigned.

I. Safety and Health Program Manager (SHPM).

1. Assign to the Project Site a full-time SHPM whose duties shall be the effective implementation, coordination, and enforcement of the CAPP. Provide support to the SHPM for the duration of the Contract. Notices posted at Project Site shall name the SHPM and describe the authority held by the position.

2. Qualification. The SHPM shall be a qualified, experienced construction industry professional having ability and authority to manage CAPP. The SHPM shall be qualified to anticipate, identify, evaluate, and implement corrective action in relation to potential safety and health hazards and dangerous exposures.

J. Joint Safety and Health Committee. Establish for the project, a functioning Joint Safety and Health Committee. Membership to include management or supervisory personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors and OBO representatives as may be needed. The Joint Safety and Health Committee, chaired by the SHPM, shall meet at regularly scheduled times and at other times as determined by the Project Director/COR. The committee shall:

1. Coordinate the management of safety and health activities and actions for effective protection.

2. Determine implementation of new safety and health measures related to forthcoming construction activities.

3. Anticipate and analyze potentially hazardous conditions, and implement safe and healthy solutions.

4. Perform Activity and Job Hazard Analysis for work activities involving unusual construction operations, work practices, or work involving hazardous materials. Develop methods and procedures to reduce identified hazards to greatest extent possible.

K. Inspections.

1. Frequent safety, health, and housekeeping inspections shall be conducted by qualified persons of temporary structures, fabrication shops, material, machinery and equipment at the Project Site. All inspections shall be documented by qualified persons. Documentation shall include any deficiencies encountered along with details and timetable for corrective actions.

2. The SHPM shall be responsible to identify and coordinate all safety, health, and housekeeping inspections.

3. The SHPM shall be responsible to verify, document, and ensure that all corrective actions have been implemented.

L. Tool Box Meetings. Contractor shall hold "tool box" safety meetings once each week. Require attendance by all tradespersons, laborers, foremen, and supervisors at Project Site; include those of separate contractors. Discuss current construction operations, analyze hazards, and communicate solutions.

3.2 TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, AND MACHINERY

M. Quality. Hand tools, power tools, equipment, machinery, materials, and personal protective apparatus shall be of manufacturer listed by U.S. or internationally recognized


testing laboratory for specific application for which they are to be used. They shall be quality products recognized for professional construction use, applications, and work practices.

N. Safe Clearance Procedure. Prior to initial use, and periodically thereafter at times of continued use, provide inspections of construction tools, equipment, and machinery. Do not permit continued use of tools, equipment, and machinery that are not in satisfactory working condition. Immediately upon identification of damage or malfunction, tag and remove from Project Site. Do not allow return of items until repaired or reprocessed in compliance with industry practice. Engage qualified persons to make such inspections and repair. Prepare written records, including recommendations for corrections of defects and misapplication.

O. Machinery and Mechanized Equipment.

1. Prior to being placed in use, all machinery and mechanized equipment shall be inspected and tested by qualified personnel and certified to be in safe operating condition. Records of tests and inspections shall be maintained at the site by the Contractor and shall become part of the official project file.

2. Tower cranes, crawler cranes, truck and wheel mounted cranes and material hoists shall be erected, tested, maintained, and repaired in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. All actions shall be documented. a) Tower cranes shall be inspected quarterly for operation and structural

integrity in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Hoisting Equipment. Provide general-use manufactured apparatus for hoisting

and material handling equipment, suitable for Project configuration, that is, for the number of stories and similar considerations and for the suitable handling of materials, fabrications, tools, equipment, work platforms, and, where applicable, for the transportation of craftspersons between grade and floor levels.

P. Walking and Working Surfaces.

1. Scaffolding shall be a standard, medium- to heavy-duty welded tubular frame or a project-designed steel tube and clamp system. All components shall be manufactured and tested according to international standards. All types of manufactured scaffolding systems shall include the scaffold manufacturer’s integrated access stairway sections, handrails, and walking platforms.

2. For all cast-in-place concrete installations of walls, columns, beams and slabs, provide manufacturer’s standard access scaffolding and work platforms which are an integral part of a pre-engineered, reusable, factory built concrete forming/shoring system consisting of pre-fabricated modular metal framed plywood or all metal panels.

3. Protect openings in floor slabs of more than 0.03 square meters (46 square inches) in area. Provide guardrails at floor slab edges that are not yet permanently walled off, where located more than 1.25 meters (4 feet) above grade or adjoining floor/deck surface.

Q. Access to Construction Operations. Provide ramps, stairs, ladders, and similar devices for craftsperson, inspector, authorized visitor, and USG personnel access and egress.

R. Noise Reduction. Minimize the generation of noises through the efficient and shielded use of materials, tools, processes and procedures. Restrict the use of noise or impact-producing tools to necessary prosecution of the work. These actions shall seek to


minimize complaints from nearby occupancies, and comply with requests of local authorities.

3.1 SITE MAINTENANCE, PROTECTION, AND SANITATION

A. General. Provide indirect, work-related, temporary support facilities and services as described below in conjunction with performance of work at Project Site.

1. Comply with Host Country governing regulations as enforced by authorities; including building codes, requirements of utility companies, health/safety regulations by police/rescue/fire departments, environmental protection regulations, and similar applicable regulations.

2. Inspections. Arrange for required inspections, certifications, and permits, for installation and use of each temporary facility, prior to use; as may be required by governing authorities and franchised service vendors.

3. Maintain temporary facilities in clean, sanitary, and safe operating conditions; and do not allow conditions of use to become inefficient, overloaded, hazardous, or otherwise deleterious to the USG's interests; comply with the Project Director’s/COR’s requests.

B. Fire Protection. Except as otherwise indicated, and in every instance, expedite/complete and place into service permanent fire protection system and equipment. Prior to the time permanent facilities are placed into service, provide temporary fire protection facilities, as will be adequate for conditions at the Project Site. Where possible, arrange jointly with Project Director/COR and local fire department to respond to calls for assistance and service in cases of fire emergency. Provide temporary portable fire extinguishers, complying with applicable provisions of NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, and UL rated; multi-purpose dry chemical type, 5.0 kg size, UL-rated "4-A:60-B:C." Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers and locate at each prime point of access to each story of construction, and at each principal office, lunch room, fabrication shop, storage enclosure, gate/guard house, and similar temporary facility at Project Site. Prohibit smoking, except in designated areas of relatively low fire hazard. During welding, cutting, and burning, comply with NFPA 51B, Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work, in fire-hazardous areas of exposure, provide stand-by fire-protection personnel and adequate supervision of operations.

C. First Aid. At project sites on which more than 99 and less than 300 persons are employed (greatest number being the total number of employees on a shift), establish and equip, as directed by a licensed physician, a first aid station staffed full time with a professional nurse trained in emergency response. If medical clinics or hospitals are accessible within five minutes of the project site, the facilities may be approved by a licensed physician for use, in lieu of a first aid station.

D. Barricades, Closures, and Traffic Control. Provide substantial barricade-type closures and rails at locations where encroachment of a physically hazardous condition in construction is possible, for equipment, tradespersons, and others at or adjoining the Project Site. Provide sidewalk bridge type protective structure where traffic, vehicular and pedestrian, cannot be excluded from hazardous areas under and nearby overhead work in progress. Provide appropriate warning signs, flashing-type warning lights, and adequate general lighting at principal barricades which are not intended to be crash-proof. Maintain barricades through periods of exposure to hazardous conditions.


E. Roadways and Walkways. Establish safe roadways and walkways in and around Project Site, and connecting with adjoining public thoroughfares. Provide signage and other markings; including traffic control signage and signals, as may be necessary and useful in controlling traffic and in restricting traffic from passing through other areas. Cooperate with local officials in the establishment and/or adjustment of street entrance/exiting signals and signs. Do not allow established traffic ways to become encumbered or obstructed with work activities, materials, parked vehicles, equipment, and similar elements. In particular, keep established entrance-and-exit passages clear for medical emergencies, escape, fire fighting, and other emergency access and egress.

F. Environmental Protection. Provide facilities and services as may be required by governing authorities to protect the environment; as it may be affected by performance of the work at the Project Site, and elsewhere, wherever work is in progress. Minimize the generation of wastes and avoid the pollution of every element of the environment. Prohibit the discharging and accidental loss of substances from the construction process that could possibly contaminate the atmosphere, surface or ground water, soil or subsoil.

G. Excavation and Demolition.

1. The Contractor, before commencement of any part of excavation or demolition, shall give any notices required to be given to adjoining landowners or other parties. Contractor shall initiate all necessary protective provisions prior to excavation or demolition of any site improvement.

2. Before excavation or demolition of any site improvement, Contractor shall examine structural condition of all adjacent structures or infrastructure, whether on site or on adjoining property. Based on examination, where there is reason to believe planned excavation or demolition will cause damage or unsafe conditions to adjacent structures or infrastructure, excavation or demolition operations shall not be performed until means have been provided to insure stability and prevent collapse of adjacent structures or infrastructure. Such means shall consist of sheet piling, shoring, bracing, underpinning, or equivalent.

3. Other protective provisions shall include, at a minimum, temporary protective coverings or enclosures of adjoining work, warning signs, and similar provisions.

H. Dust Control. Where and when applicable, implement a suitable program for dust control in and around the Project Site, designed to reduce dust generation/ distribution to reasonable level. Coordinate with environmental protection program.

I. Rodent, Pest, and Vermin Control. Employ specialized services to eliminate or minimize the threat of deleterious effects from insects, animals, and other vermin at Project Site. Up to and at the time of substantial completion, the Project and Project Site will be relatively free of entrenched and harbored pests of every description. Employ only environmentally safe methods and products in the control of rodents, pests and other vermin.

J. Potable Water. Where reasonably possible, provide potable water for entire water requirement of construction period. Where and when that is not possible, provide potable water for drinking and other uses where specified; clearly marked with signage in multiple languages as appropriate for site location; with source as Contractor's option: City-controlled piped water, well on site, commercially bottled water, or other reliable source. Demonstrate on a monthly basis to the Project Director/COR that the potable water from all selected sources is safe for human consumption. Sterilize piping of temporary potable water systems prior to use.

K. Construction Site Sanitation and Health Facilities.


1. Toilets Facilities and Restrooms. a) Toilet facilities are defined as enclosures containing one or more toilet

fixtures or commodes for the purpose of defecation or urination or both. A urinal is a toilet fixture maintained within a toilet room for the sole purpose of urination. A toilet facility or restroom may be a temporary structure, portable units, or a permanent facility.

b) The Project Site shall be provided with adequate toilet facilities. Separate facilities shall be provided for each sex and properly labeled in English and the commonly understood local language. Pictograms shall be used. The sewage disposal method shall comply with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Toilet facilities shall be provided so as to be readily accessible to all employees. As far as is practicable, toilet facilities shall be located within sixty-one (61) meters (200 feet) of all locations where workers are regularly performing the work. The number of toilet fixtures shall be based on the anticipated maximum number of workers at Project Site. An adequate supply of toilet paper shall be maintained at all times. A hand-washing lavatory shall be provided in close proximity to all toilet facilities.

c) The construction and installation of toilet facilities shall be accepted by the Project Director/COR and shall be in compliance with, if appropriate, all-applicable local jurisdictional codes. The floors, walls, partition, and doors of all toilet facilities shall be of a hard, impervious finish that can be easily cleaned. Floors shall be concrete. Walls and partitions shall be constructed of concrete masonry units, and doors shall be of metal or solid wood. All surface finishes shall be chosen to facilitate cleaning and the maintenance of the highest standards of sanitation.

d) Each toilet or commode shall occupy a separate compartment or stall which shall be equipped with a door and latch. Partitions and doors shall be of nonabsorbent materials. The walls of compartments, stalls, or partitions between the toilets or commodes may be less that the height of room walls, but the top shall not be less than one hundred seventy-three (173) centimeters (5 feet, 8 inches) from the floor and the bottom not more than thirty (30) centimeters (1 foot) above the floor.

e) In all newly constructed toilet rooms, the floors and exterior walls to a height of fifteen (15) centimeters (6 inches) above the floor shall be of watertight construction to facilitate cleaning and sanitation.

f) Every toilet fixture, commode, or urinal shall be so installed that the space around and behind the fixture can be easily cleaned.

g) Where non-sewer waste disposal systems are permitted, these shall be of a type accepted by the local health authorities having jurisdiction. These systems shall be maintained in a sanitary condition.

2. Lavatories and Personal Washing Facilities.

a) A lavatory is a basin or similar vessel for washing hands, arms, face and head. Adequate facilities for maintaining personal cleanliness shall be provided at the Project Site. Facilities shall be convenient for employee access and shall be maintained in a sanitary condition.

b) Lavatories shall be provided at or adjacent to all toilet facilities. Lavatories with adequate hot (43°-60°C or 110°-140°F) and cold water


shall be provided. Mixing or combination supply fixtures are preferable. Sixty (60) centimeter diameter (24 inch) basin rims shall be considered as equal to one lavatory. In all instances, a dispenser containing a suitable skin cleaning agent shall be provided at each lavatory.

3. Drinking Fountains and Dispensers.

a) Provide an adequate number of drinking water fountains or dispensers, distributed for convenience and efficiency, around the Project Site and service support areas. Maintain an adequate supply of sanitary disposable paper cups and waste receptacles at each water dispenser.

b) Provide bottled drinking water where piped potable water service is not available.

4. Shower Facilities.

a) Where employees are exposed to skin contamination with poisonous, infectious, or irritating material (cement, lime, solvents, etc.), or where unsanitary or unhealthful working conditions require bathing before leaving the Project Site, the Contractor shall provide shower facilities in the ratio of one per each fifteen persons so exposed. Showers shall be supplied with ample hot (43°-60°C or 110°-140°F) and cold water.

b) A dispenser containing a suitable skin-cleaning agent shall be provided at each shower. Individual hand towels of cloth or paper shall be provided. Proper receptacles or other sanitary means shall be provided for the disposal of used towels. The provision of a loop towel rack for general or common use shall be prohibited as unsanitary.

5. Laundry Facilities.

a) Provide laundering of work clothing and coveralls that have become contaminated with poisonous, irritating or infectious material (cement, lime, solvents, etc.). The Contractor shall provide clean sets of laundered clothing or coveralls as part of the protective clothing requirement.

b) Should the process in which the worker is engaged be such that the individual’s work clothing becomes wet or has to be washed between shifts, the Contractor shall make such provision to dry such clothing before reuse.

6. Changing Rooms.

a) Changing or dressing rooms shall be provided whenever it is the local practice or a requirement to change from street clothing to work clothing.

b) Street and work clothing shall not be stored in contact with each other in changing rooms.

7. Lunch Rooms, Mess Halls, Dining Facilities, and Food Service Operations.

a) An enclosed facility shall be provided and set aside specifically for employees to eat lunch at the Project Site. The minimum area per person shall be specified as 1.0 square meter or 11 square feet. The Contractor shall provide such enclosed facilities to accommodate at one time 50% of


the maximum number of non-office-occupant personnel anticipated and as authorized to be at Project Site.

b) These facilities shall be equipped with tables and chairs or benches to seat the number of persons anticipated. The Contractor shall specify suitable floor, wall, and ceiling finishes, doors and windows, screening, and suitable fixtures and accessories. The Contractor shall provide general lighting, HVAC system, and drinking fountains or dispensers.

c) These dining facilities shall be physically separated from toilets at a minimum distance of sixty-one (61) meters (200 feet). Dining facilities shall be physically separated from all locations where there is the threat of exposure to toxic or infectious materials.

d) Perishable home-prepared lunches are a potential source of food-borne illness when stored at room temperature. Accordingly, the Contractor shall provide refrigeration facilities capable of maintaining a temperature of 7°C or 45°F or lower for the storage of lunches prior to consumption. Should local law require that meals be provided, the Contractor shall accommodate those requirements.

e) The Contractor shall provide space, utilities, and support services for the installation of vending machines for drinks and incidental foods. The Contractor shall establish, administer, and supervise service contracts with local vending firms. These contracts and the plan for their execution in practice must be cleared by the Project Director/COR and the Site Security Manager.

f) If the Contractor provides prepared or pre-prepared catered meals at the Project Site, all employee food service facilities and operations shall meet and comply with relevant requirements of the FDA 2001 Food Code or latest edition.

L. Waste Handling and Janitorial Services.

1. General. Provide proper and adequate segregated waste containers for the collection and removal of waste materials in different categories. These include, but are not limited to: hazardous wastes, flammable wastes, sanitary and health-care wastes, garbage, wastes for recycling as required by local authorities, inert and dry wastes, and incidental debris from the construction process. Dispose of general non-organic wastes at seven (7) day intervals. Dispose of organic, garbage, and similar temperature-sensitive wastes at three (3) day intervals when the average outdoors-daily maximum temperature can be expected to be above 18°C. Clean waste containers regularly and adequately. Dispose of wastes in a lawful manner. a) Contractor may develop and implement a waste management plan that

quantifies material diversion goals and methods of salvage and recycling in order to earn LEED points as described in Contract Section C.

2. On a daily basis the Contractor shall keep the Project and Construction Site clean and clear of accumulated wastes, including surplus materials, trimmings, incidental demolished work, and construction debris. Clean completed elements and portions of work, and maintain in "broom clean" condition, except as otherwise indicated by the Project Director/COR.

3. On a daily basis, provide janitorial services, including the restocking of


disposable products, for the maintenance of temporary offices, security spaces, toilets, first-aid rooms, lunchrooms, shower/locker rooms, and similar facilities. Scrub toilet and first-aid room fixtures and floors daily, and scrub floors and walls of shower rooms daily. Provide weekly cleaning, damp mopping, or vacuuming, as may be appropriate, for other floors. Provide monthly washing of windows and cleaning of other walls, ceilings, light fixtures, and similar facility surfaces. Comply with the Project Director’s/COR’s specific requests to maintain facilities in a reasonably clean and sanitary condition at all times. Extend janitorial services to include permanent facilities as may be authorized for use as temporary facilities.


DIVISION 1 <PROJECT TYPE>, Embassy of the United States, <POST NAME> SECTION 01521 – CONSTRUCTION SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH ATTACHMENT “A” – GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF THE CONSTRUCTION ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (CAPP)

OBO/PE/CC/CPI <PROJECT TYPE, POST NAME> Revision FY04.01 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH 25MAR04 ATTACHMENT “A” – GUIDELINES, PREPARATION OF THE CONSTRUCTION ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (CAPP) 01521 – A-1

<<< The following document is an example of a CAPP >>> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF STATE

OVERSEAS BUILDINGS OPERATIONS Project Name & CONTRACT No. ------------ CONSTRUCTION ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (CAPP) NAME OF CONTRACTOR: POLICY. The (name of Contractor) accident prevention policy, ensures that all of our employees have a firm understanding of our company's position regarding the protection of all persons, public, and property during all phases of new construction and renovation works, of U.S. Department of State buildings. In implementation of the accident prevention policy, (name of Contractor) accepts full responsibility for the establishment and implementation of an effective construction safety and occupational health program at the project site. PURPOSE. The Construction Accident Prevention Plan (CAPP), herein, establishes organizational and management elements necessary to implement an effective Safety and Health Program. The CAPP, as a policy and management document, will comply with the latest edition, of the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety And Health Requirements Manual EM 385-1-1. The objective of (name of Contractor) is to provide for a safe working construction environment, a strong safety awareness by all of our supervisors and workers, and the safe use of tools, machinery and equipment. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS. The Project will comply with the following regulations: · U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Safety and Health Requirements Manual, EM 385-1-1, latest edition.

· U.S. Department of State Foreign Affairs Manual Volume 6 Subchapter 610, Safety Health and Environmental Management Program, with latest changes.

· NFPA Code 241, Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.

· ANSI A10 series standards for Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition.

· NFPA Code 51B, Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work.

· NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

· NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

· 2001 Food Code, Food and Drug Administration, National Technical Information Service Publication PD2002-100819, or latest edition.

· Rigging, by James Headley, Crane Institute of America Publishing Company, Maintland Florida, 2001.



ORGANIZATIONAL/ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITY FOR CAPP. Mr./Ms. (name), the Project Manager, has been given full authority, responsibility, and support by (name of Contractor) for the administration and implementation of the CAPP. Safety and Health Program Manager (SHPM). To assist our Project Manager, a qualified Safety and Health Program Manager (SHPM) will be appointed (full time) to administer and implement the (CAPP). The Project Manager and the Safety and Health Program Manager have been delegated with corporate responsibility and authority to identify safe and unhealthful conditions and to take corrective action to abate or eliminate such conditions. The SHPM is a qualified, experienced, construction industry professional possessing the ability and authority to manage this CAPP. The SHPM will anticipate, identify, evaluate, and implement corrective action to abate or reduce potential safety and health hazards and dangerous exposures. Joint Safety and Health Committee. (name of Contractor) will establish for the duration of the project a functional Joint Safety and Health Committee for this project. Membership will be by official appointment and will include supervisory personnel from our company and from our subcontractors. The SHPM will coordinate and delegate the activities of the Committee. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS. Emergency Plans. (name of Contractor) will establish jointly with Project Director/COR, in the event of fire or other emergency, Emergency Plans for the safe evacuation of all persons at the Project Site. Emergency Plans that are relative to (name of Contractor) construction operations will be submitted to the Project Director/COR for acceptance. Plans will be tested/evaluated monthly to ascertain their effectiveness. First Aid Station. (name of Contractor) understands that on OBO construction project sites on which more than 99 and less than 300 persons are employed (greatest number being the total number of employees on a shift) at the site, there shall be established and equipped, as directed by a licensed physician, a first aid station staffed full time with a professional nurse trained in emergency response. If medical clinics or hospitals are accessible within five minutes of the project site, the facilities may be approved by a licensed physician for use, in lieu of a first aid station. Activity and Worker Hazard Analysis. The Project Manager, SHPM, and the Joint Safety and Health Committee, will assess safety and health issues associated with special construction activities in the schedule. Prior to each major phase of the work, the Project Manager will prepare and submit an Activity and Worker Hazard Analysis report to the Project Director/COR for acceptance. Safety Training and Orientation. "New Hire" training will be conducted by . New employees to the Project Site will be required to attend an employee safety orientation program, at which time, safety rules will be explained by the SHPM. A copy of the project safety rules will be given to each new employee, who will be required to sign a statement stating that he/she has been instructed in the safety philosophy of the company, have been given a copy of the project safety rules, and understand them.



In addition, all employees will observe and obey rules at Post governing the conduct and behavior of persons performing construction work in an occupied U.S. Department of State facility. Violation of Safety Rules. (name of Contractor) will initiate a procedure/mechanism to discipline all workers who repeatedly violate safety rules. (Example: the procedure may include the termination of an employee after one verbal and two written warnings for the same violation). Tool Box Safety Meetings – Coordination and Communication. To ensure better safety and health awareness, (name of Contractor) will communicate, through weekly Tool Box meetings, a corporate safety and health philosophy to all construction personnel. Records of attendance and documentation of topics for each meeting will be kept. Topics will include but not be limited to protection of employees, personal protective clothing/equipment, fall protection, fire prevention, fire protection, emergency evacuation procedures, and the safe use of power tools and machinery. Material Safety Data Sheets. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all hazardous chemical substances in use on Project Site will be obtained from the manufacturer and kept on Project Site. Workers who are assigned to work with hazardous substances will be trained in the proper procedures and precautionary measures to be taken while using such substances/products. Safe Clearance Procedure. Prior to initial use, and periodically thereafter at times of continued use, (name of Contractor) will inspect all construction tools, equipment and machinery. (name of Contractor) will not permit continued use of tools equipment and machinery which are not in good condition. Damaged or malfunctioning tools or equipment will be tagged and immediately removed from service. Hazardous Work Permits. (name of Contractor) and subcontractors will submit written requests to Project Director/COR for Hazardous Work Permits when construction operations include the following:

1. Hot Work. Work that results in open flames such as welding, cutting, brazing and burning. (name of Contractor) will provide effective fire protection and prevention at all times during such operations.

2. Confined Space Entry. Work in enclosed areas such as storage tanks, bins, sewers, in-ground vaults, boilers, tunnels, manholes etc.

3. Internal Combustion Engines. Use of trucks, forklifts, pumps, or generators, powered by petroleum-based fuel, when inside a building structure or confined space.

4. Explosive Actuated Tools. Powder charged tools (Hilti, Remington, Ram Set and other manufactures) used for fastening purposes.

Temporary Electrical Power. (name of Contractor), if requested, will submit to Project Director/COR, for acceptance, a plan of proposed temporary power distribution and the means of protection of all circuits including receptacles, grounding, and ground fault circuit interrupters.



Inspections. Under the direction of the SHPM, (name of Contractor) will provide for frequent safety, health, and housekeeping inspections of Project Site. Temporary structures, fabrication shops, material storage areas, all machinery, tools and equipment will be inspected to ensure compliance with USACE Safety and Health Requirements Manual EM 385-1-1. Records of inspections, and a timetable for corrective action will be maintained. Reporting Work Related Injuries. All work related injuries will be reported to Project Director/COR. A daily log of first aid treatment will be kept at the location of the first aid station. Injuries requiring off-site medical treatment will be reported to Project Director/COR. An accident report will be completed by a supervisor or foreman for each work related injury or illness resulting in lost time. Accident Investigation. All accidents involving death, multiple hospitalizations, or excessive property damage will be officially investigated and reported under the authority and direction of the Project Director/COR. END OF ATTACHMENT “A” SECTION 01521


SECTION 01771 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Refer to individual technical specification sections of Divisions 2 through 16 which shall be developed by the Contractor during the design phase, for unique completion and closeout requirements for each unit of work, including unique closeout submittal requirements.

C. Refer to Section 01101, Construction Execution and Coordination, for information related to field engineering activities, construction coordination documentation, and handling of government-furnished furniture.

D. Refer to Section 01331, Construction Submittals, for information related to submittal of record documents.

E. Refer to Section 01401, Contractor’s Quality Control, for information related to development of the punch list (Schedule of Defects).

F. Refer to Section 01501, Temporary Facilities and Controls, for information related to removal and demolition of temporary facilities and restoration of permanent facilities.

G. Refer to Section 01781, Operation and Maintenance Data, for information related to warranties and maintenance agreements and preparation of Operation and Maintenance Data.

H. Refer to Section 01811, Start-up and Commissioning, for information related to commissioning requirements and commencement of warranty periods.

I. Refer to Section 01821, Demonstration and Training, for information related to training records.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The requirements of this Section relate, primarily, to administration and procedures for the following:

1. Achieving "Substantial Completion" 2. Achieving "Final Acceptance" 3. Record documents and final submittals 4. Warranty management 5. Other closeout and turnover activities

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with the details described in this section, Contractor shall submit the following:

1. Request for inspection and Certification of Substantial Completion


2. Request for final inspection 3. Final Record Documents

1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. General: Before or concurrently with request to the Project Director/COR for inspection and Certification of Substantial Completion, either on the entire work of the Contractor or each defined portion thereof, complete the following related to that part of the work:

1. In the Progress Payment Request, which coincides with or follows the date claimed for Substantial Completion, either show "100 percent complete" or list non-substantial items of work that remain incomplete, along with percentage completion and explanation for being incomplete; include copies of supporting documentation.

2. In accordance with Section 01781, Operation and Maintenance Data, and similar sections, submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, certifications, and similar documents relating to continuing obligations.

3. Obtain and submit releases, enabling the USG's full-and unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities, including occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar documents.

4. Submit record documents as described below to the Project Director/COR. 5. Deliver in the manner requested by the Project Director/COR,

operating/maintenance tools, surplus Government-furnished materials, spare parts, required extra stock of materials (attic stock), keys to locks, and similar required physical items.

6. Submit Commissioning Report in accordance with Section 01811, Start-up and Commissioning. Commissioning activities not completed prior to substantial completion shall be recorded as punch list items on the Schedule of Defects.

7. Make final changeover from temporary facilities/services to permanent, including lock cylinders and similar items. Advise everyone at Project Site of precise time for each changeover; comply with the Project Director’s/COR’s requests on timing of security-related changeovers.

8. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the USG's operating and maintenance personnel.

9. Remove temporary facilities, construction tools and equipment, mock-ups, rejected materials, and similar items of construction not incorporated into permanent work; including surplus materials.

10. Report uninstalled government-furnished furniture and arrange for transfer to post as described below.

11. Make physical adjustments, correct minor defects, touch-up finishes, lubricate operating parts, and clean equipment and surfaces as required for use, occupancy, and operation.

12. Provide certification that asbestos and lead paint were not introduced as building material during the construction of the building in accordance with requirements of Contract Section H.


B. The Project Director/COR will respond to each request by Contractor for certification of Substantial Completion, either by promptly providing a statement of known deficiencies in the work, or by proceeding with requested initial inspection of that part of the work.

1. Substantial Items. Following inspections, the Project Director/COR will submit to the Contractor a list of all work items deemed substantial and not completed, not to the agreed upon standard of quality or performance, or patently deficient. These shall be completed, corrected, or otherwise brought up to standard prior to issuance of any requested certification.

2. After effecting completion and corrective actions, the Contractor shall request re-inspection, in writing, of the Project Director/COR.

3. When completion and corrective actions have been made, the Project Director/COR will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. This Certificate may or may not be accompanied by a listing of non-substantial items, as defined below.

4. Non-Substantial Items. The Certificate of Substantial Completion may be issued with a list of all remaining omissions, deficiencies, and patent defects deemed by the Project Director/COR to be non-substantial. These items shall be completed and corrected prior to the issuance of the Certificate of Final Acceptance.

5. All omissions, deficiencies, and patent defects will be included in initial and subsequent punch lists (Schedules of Defects) and shall be a matter of project record. Initial punch lists shall be prepared as described in Section 01401, Contractor’s Quality Control. All punch list items shall be documented and resolved prior to the issuance of the Certificate of Final Acceptance.

6. In addition to the above actions and remedies, the Contractor shall be responsible for all omissions, deficiencies, patent and latent deficiencies not uncovered in the course of the several inspections. The Project Director/COR shall determine applicability of these items to the agreed upon standards of contract performance.

1.5 PROCEDURES FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. General. The Contractor shall notify the Project Director/COR at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the point in time at which the Contractor believes all Contract work shall be ready for final USG inspection, systems validation, and testing. The USG will proceed without delay to initiate preliminary inspections and testing. The USG shall then promptly notify the Contractor in writing should it determine that portions of work not be ready for final acceptance. Further, the USG shall notify the Contractor whether any such portion of work may separately delay final acceptance beyond the final acceptance of other portions of work.

B. Prior to Final Inspection and Testing. The Contractor shall complete the following before requesting final inspection and testing of the work:

1. Complete and correct all Schedule of Defects (Punch List) work items determined to be "non-substantial." These are items identified by the Project Director/COR at the time of the issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

2. Provide a copy of the Project Director’s/COR’s Schedule of Defects (Punch List), bearing the Contractor's certified statement of completion or correction, itemized for each work element identified thereon AND the Project Director’s/COR’s acceptance by endorsement.

3. Provide final certificates of insurance for products installed, as required.


4. Provide final certificates of insurance for completed operations, as required. 5. Provide the final meter-readings and service-dates for utilities and services paid

for by Contractor. Where applicable, provide the beginning meter-readings and service-dates for utilities and services to be paid for by the USG. Include similar cut-off points, measurements, and readings for stored fuels and other consumable products and services.

6. If applicable, provide a project Statement of "Consent of Surety." 7. Prepare an updated final statement, showing extended sequence and accounting

of final changes to Contract Price being claimed. 8. Prepare the Application for Payment – Final Request, for submittal to the

Contracting Officer, including copies of supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted.

9. Provide a statement regarding the settlement of any liquidated damages, acceptable to the Project Director/COR.

C. Re-inspection, Testing, and Final Acceptance.

1. The Contractor shall submit a request for final inspection and acceptance that shall include a statement that all foregoing requirements as identified, above, have been fulfilled. As applicable, the Contractor shall include a statement listing itemized work items known to be incomplete or deficient, an explanation of why each item is incomplete or deficient, and the Project Director’s/COR’s endorsement recognizing the circumstances of the specific non-performance.

2. The Project Director/COR shall proceed with re-inspection and testing of the work.

3. Following final re-inspection, the Project Director/COR shall advise the Contractor of all work items incomplete or deficient and of any unfulfilled obligations. These shall be required for final acceptance and shall include any requirements for testing or re-testing.

4. As determined by the Project Director’s/COR’s re-inspection, the Contractor shall complete all requested work items, obligations, tests, and similar actions.

5. Upon the Contractor's satisfactory completion and correction of all work items, the Project Director/COR shall prepare, sign, and issue a Certificate of Final Acceptance, forwarding same to the Contracting Officer.

6. The Contracting Officer will notify Contractor of final acceptance, negotiate adjustments to the final payment, if necessary, and authorize the release of final payment funds.

1.6 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

A. General. Comply with general requirements of Section 01331, Construction Submittals, for the preparation and processing of final record document submittals. Refer to individual technical specification sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for specific record document submittal requirements on individual units of work.

B. Develop and maintain an original mark-up set of contract documents and submittals, as required for final record document submittals, at Project Site and available for the Project Director’s/COR’s reference. Protect from deterioration and loss, and retain in a secure and fire-resistant space. Do not use for construction purposes. Mark up changes and additional information developed during construction, as may be of future interest or value to the USG. These may be requested by the Project Director/COR regarding


whatever document or submittal copy may be most capable of showing the change or other data most clearly. Where applicable, show each change as part of a related Contract Modification, by change order number.

C. At time of Substantial Completion, submit the following final record documents, marked up to represent "As-Built" documentation, to the Project Director/COR, and in the form and manner specified below.

1. Record As-Built Drawings. Maintain a full set of the latest revised issue of each drawing sheet, black-line print; marked up using different colors of pencils or pens, to differentiate between change order numbers. Clearly define hidden dimensions and similar data that would be difficult to obtain at a later date. Show conditions not clearly detailed by shop drawings or coordination drawings. Show cross-references to such other records of final data. Organize marked-up prints into set(s) as originally released. Mark each set for identification and date of release as record copy (Substantial Completion date), and transmit to the Project Director/COR. Marked-up set of as-builts shall be transferred and updated on the original design AutoCAD files. Indicate “As-Built” conditions as documented from actual installation. Contractor shall provide one set of 3.5” or CD disks, one (1) reproducible and three black line copies.

2. Record Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. Maintain a full set of accepted shop drawing black-line prints; marked up using different colors of pencils or pens, to differentiate between change order numbers. Show cross-reference where change has been marked up on another document or submittal. Organize shop drawings into sub-sets, as received from each fabricator, and identify by related Contract Specification section number. Show date of release as record copy (Substantial Completion date), and transmit to the Project Director/COR. a) Prepare and transmit marked-up copies of coordination drawings, similar

to requirements for record shop drawings. 3. Field Engineering Submittals.

a) Make final corrections to site survey, drawings showing buried utilities and similar underground elements, field survey-and-measurement drawings, and similar drawings.

b) Final Property Survey. Contractor shall prepare and submit a final property survey in accordance with requirements of Section 01101, Construction Execution and Coordination. § Media shall be one correctable polyester film positive print, ten

black-line copies, and digital files on CD-ROM in the version of AutoCad currently specified by project contract documents.

c) Surveyor’s Log. Contractor shall submit surveyor’s log prepared and maintained for the project in accordance with Section 01101, Construction Execution and Coordination.

4. Construction coordination documentation. Submit as a consolidated, organized collection, documents prepared to support construction coordination as described in Section 01101, Construction Execution and Coordination. Documentation shall include, but not be limited to, minutes of meetings, submittal register, and shipping logs.

5. Record Contract Specifications. Maintain a full set of the Contract Specifications, marked up to record minor changes in the printed text and to


show cross references to other documentation recording changes. Where additional writing space is needed, either insert extra sheets with such notations, or write on the blank backsides of preceding pages. Give particular attention to accepted substitutions, selection between options, and similar record information; and give priority to the recording of such data that cannot be easily discerned by subsequent observation at the Project. Mark each volume of specification set for identification and date of release as record copy (Substantial Completion date), and transmit to the Project Director/COR.

6. Record Product Data. Maintain a full set of accepted product data submittals, marked up to show specific selections for products as actually supplied and installed. Where changes subsequent to acceptance have affected product selection, either obtain corrected product data sheets or mark up sheets to show changes. Show departures, if any, from manufacturers' instructions in accordance with Contract Section H. Mark each submittal with related section number of Construction Specifications, bind in that sequence in conveniently sized binders, identify and date binders (Substantial Completion date), entitle "Replacement Products Procurement Manual," and transmit to the Project Director/COR. a) Include with each submittal of record product data reference copies of

final warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, performance certifications, and similar required documentation of required assurances.

b) Include with each submittal of record product data, final copies of related inspection and test reports, certificates of compliance (with requirements), and similar quality assurance documentation.

7. Record Samples and Mockups. Prior to the time of Substantial Completion, meet with the Project Director/COR at the Project Site and determine which of remaining submitted samples and prepared mockups are required for the USG's continued retention. Mark each such element with appropriate identification and date of Substantial Completion. Pack in appropriately identified cardboard containers and deliver to designated storage space at the Project Site, as requested by the Project Director/COR.

8. Operation and Maintenance Data. Submit Operation and Maintenance Data in accordance with Section 01781, Operation and Maintenance Data.

9. Training Records. Submit training records prepared in accordance with Section 01821, Demonstration and Training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION

1.1 TURNOVER OF FACILITIES TO THE USG

Comply with instructions of Contracting Officer and the Project Director/COR for procedures, sequence, timing, and similar considerations for the turning over of facilities to the USG's personnel for operating, maintenance, occupancy, protection, and general care and custody.

1.2 POSTED OPERATING DIAGRAMS / INSTRUCTIONS / DATA

A. Posted Instructions. Except as otherwise indicated, post operating and maintenance instructions at and for all facility components, building systems, and each principal unit


of operational equipment, including safety, security, and protective equipment/system/devices. These shall include, but not be limited to, wiring diagrams, system piping and wiring layouts, and valves and control sequences. Post in both English and host country predominant language and, for emergency-type postings, include international form of pictorial-graphic signage. Instructions shall be attached upon or located near each component, system, or piece of equipment and shall be framed in glass, Plexiglas, or similar material and shall be illuminated, as necessary, to ensure availability for use. Provide protected, tamper-resistant signage, of a permanent nature for the exposure conditions in each case. Locate for convenience of operating and maintenance personnel, but concealed from others, except in the case of general-usage and emergency facilities.

B. Equipment Dataplates. Provide permanent information plate on each item of operating equipment which is connected with services, has operating parts, or is likely to require servicing, parts replacements, control, testing, or similar care and maintenance. Locate inconspicuously, but allow for ease of operating, maintenance, and replacement procedures. Provide appropriate information on dataplate in each case, including the following minimum data as applicable:

1. Name of manufacturer and product 2. Date of manufacture and installation 3. Model designation and serial number 4. Capacity, speed, service rating, weight, and similar operational data

C. Labels and Nameplates.

1. Provide permanent product labels and nameplates, including certified compliance stamps and similar required product markings. Locate labels and nameplates in accessible place that is not readily visible to general occupants of the building from exterior or interior. Except as otherwise indicated, limit size of plates and printing for ease of reading from distance of 350 mm.

2. Except for required safety/emergency signage, do not provide permanently attached labels, nameplates, trade names, trademarks, and similar markings on product surfaces exposed to view by general occupants of Project. Comply with Project Director’s/COR’s requests for removal of non-required markings, and for removal/replacement or refinishing of products disfigured by such markings.

1.3 GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED FURNITURE

As described in detail in Section 01101, Construction Execution and Coordination, Contractor shall develop and complete deficiency (punch) lists for Government-furnished furniture and revise as-built/as-installed drawings. Contractor shall also report uninstalled inventory and arrange for transfer to post responsibility. These requirements as well as commissioning requirements for systems furniture shall be completed as part of the closeout procedures.

1.4 WARRANTY MANAGEMENT

A. The purpose of the warranty management process shall be to provide the USG with a high level of assurance that the building systems as delivered by the Contractor are free of defect, both patent and latent, that all required warranties are valid, that warranty support systems and methodologies are in place, both locally and remote, and that USG support staff have a full understanding of the continued operation and maintenance of said systems.


B. The period of warranty management coverage is logically greater than the individual system warranty periods. As a management process, it shall commence early in the start-up and commissioning phase and end at a period normally one year (12 months) from the issuance by the USG of final acceptance certification, unless otherwise agreed upon.

C. As defined in Section 01811, Start-Up and Commissioning, the commencement date for each respective warranty period shall be the date of formal acceptance of each facility component and building system by the Project Director/COR following recommendation for acceptance by the Commissioning Authority.

D. The Contractor shall make available to the Project Site a qualified representative, knowledgeable in the operation and maintenance of the various building systems as installed in the works, who shall be responsible for warranty management. This individual shall be qualified to address, record, and resolve all warranty issues during the warranty period. The main action agent during the warranty management period may be the Commissioning Authority or any other qualified agent certified by the Contractor to act on its behalf.

E. The warranty management agent shall perform the following

1. Communicate and coordinate all actions with the responsible, local USG representative, normally the Facility Maintenance Manager.

2. Be responsive to all building systems deficiencies, patent and latent, including inspection, evaluation, and documentation of same.

3. Arrange for all repairs or replacements of all warrantable deficiencies. 4. Document all issues, actions, and solutions. These records shall be incorporated

as a part of the project document set and shall be surrendered to the local USG representative upon termination of the program.

5. Record and develop a report on expected times between failure of system components.

6. As a follow up to warranty actions, review procedures with USG operating and maintenance staff to verify they are executing their responsibilities in accordance and compliance with building systems procedures so as to avoid conditions that might lead to warranty action or denial of action.

7. Develop a summary of lessons learned during the warranty management process to be incorporated into the Maintenance Plan as described in Section 01781, Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.5 FINAL CLEANUP

A. Initial Cleaning. Except as otherwise indicated, provide initial cleaning of each non-embedded unit of work promptly upon nominal completion-and-curing of its installation. Maintain in protected and sufficiently clean condition, through remainder of construction duration, so as to prevent staining or other deleterious effect of soiling. Promptly remove significant soiling, including graffiti deposits, occurring during construction. Always comply with product manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, including limitations, for the cleaning of exposed surfaces and for the use of cleaning substances and devices.

B. Final Cleaning. Immediately prior to the time(s) of the Project Director’s/COR’s inspection(s) of work for certification of Substantial Completion, repeat cleaning operations. Use experienced cleaning personnel and proven methods and materials so as to achieve the level of cleanliness normally expected for a U.S.-located, first-class,


commercial or institutional building project. In addition to specific cleaning as may be required by related technical specification sections hereof, comply with the following as applicable:

1. Comply with governing regulations, including safety standards and environmental protection regulations. Do not burn waste materials at Project Site. Dispose of waste materials in a lawful manner, and do not bury at Project Site, except as may be authorized by the Project Director/COR. Dispose of surpluses as required by the Contract. Do not discharge volatile and other dangerous or deleterious fluids into drainage systems.

2. Remove temporary facilities and construction tools, equipment, and devices including temporary buildings, enclosures, and protective coverings. Restore substrates as required. Where permanent facilities were used for temporary service, restore to nearly new and unused condition. For additional details, refer to Section 01501, Temporary Facilities and Controls.

3. Clean the entire Project Site, including landscape development areas and site improvements. Remove rubbish, debris, litter, unauthorized or unwanted plant growths and weeds. Sweep the paved areas to a broom-clean condition and remove stains, including petrol-chemical spills and similar deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even-textured surface.

4. Remove debris and dust from limited-access spaces of Project including roofs, plenums, crawl spaces, shafts, tunnels, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

5. Clean exterior and interior exposed surfaces to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, graffiti, films, and other noticeable and deleterious substances. Restore reflective polishes, and applied treatments, including sealed and waxed finishes. Vacuum clean interior exposed non-treated concrete surfaces and vacuum clean carpeted areas and other soft surfaces after removal of spots and stains. Avoid disruption of natural weathering, which may be underway on certain exposed exterior surfaces.

6. Wipe accessible surfaces clean on mechanical, electrical, and similar equipment and fixtures, including lighting fixtures. Remove excess lubrications and similar substances.

7. Remove exposed-to-view labels not required as permanent labels. 8. Clean transparent materials, including glazed panels and mirrors, to a polished

condition free of visible dirt and films with sealant trimmed away neatly. Replace broken and noticeably abraded glass and plastic units.

9. Clean and sanitize food service, sanitary, health care, and similar equipment and fixtures so as to be ready for the intended use in each case. Remove stains, including those resulting from water exposures.

10. Jointly inspect the entire Project Site with the Project Director/COR. Where required, engage specialized firm(s) to rid the Project Site of roaches, pests, and other vermin.



PART 1 - SECTION 02080 - PIPED UTILITIES - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

SCHEDULE 0 - GENERAL

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - SUMMARY

1.1 This Section includes the following:

a. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. b. Transition fittings. c. Sleeves. d. Identification devices. e. Grout. f. Piped utility demolition. g. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. h. Painting and finishing. i. Concrete bases. j. Metal supports and anchorages.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - DEFINITIONS

1.1 Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions.

1.2 Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

1.3 The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

a. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. b. HDPE: High density polyethylene plastic. c. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - SUBMITTALS

1.1 Product Data: For the following:

a. Identification devices.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.1 Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

1.2 Document any applicable local codes or authorities and ensure that all relevant work is in compliance.


1.3 Implement applicable provisions of the Quality Control program as established in Section 01401, “Contractor’s Quality Control.”

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1.1 Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

1.2 Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - COORDINATION

1.1 Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

1.2 Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied to surfaces.

SCHEDULE 1 - PRODUCTS

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

1.1 Refer to individual Division 2 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - JOINING MATERIALS

1.1 Refer to individual Division 2 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

1.2 Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

a. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

1.5 Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

a. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. b. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. c. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - TRANSITION FITTINGS

1.1 AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

a. Underground Piping DN 40 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. b. Underground Piping DN 50 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type

coupling.

1.2 Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - SLEEVES

1.1 Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

1.2 PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

1.1 General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 2 Sections. If more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

1.2 Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.

a. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification.

b. Thickness: 1.6 mm, for units up to 130 sq. cm or 200 mm in length, and 3 mm for larger units.

c. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.

1.3 Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in piped utility identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of piped utility systems and equipment.

a. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of same name are indicated.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - GROUT

1.1 Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

a. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

b. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength. c. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

SCHEDULE 2 - EXECUTION

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION

1.1 Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components in conflict with new construction.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping in conflict with new construction and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

1.2 If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 2 Sections specifying piping systems.

1.2 Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

1.3 Install piping to permit valve servicing.

1.4 Install piping at indicated slopes.

1.5 Install piping free of sags and bends.

1.6 Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

1.7 Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

1.8 Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.


1.9 Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

1.10 Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

a. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

1) Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas 50 mm above finished floor level.

b. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

1) PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than DN 150. 2) Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 DN 150 and larger, penetrating

gypsum-board partitions.

1.11 Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

1.12 Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

1.1 Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 2 Sections specifying piping systems.

1.2 Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

1.3 Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

b. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. c. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

d. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.

1.4 Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

1.5 Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - PIPING CONNECTIONS

1.1 Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:


a. Install unions, in piping DN 50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

b. Install flanges, in piping DN 65 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.

1.2 Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

1.3 Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - PAINTING

1.1 Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 6 - CONCRETE BASES

1.1 Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

a. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 100 mm larger in both directions than supported unit.

b. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 450-mm centers around the full perimeter of the base.

c. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extends through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

d. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

e. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

f. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. g. Use 20.7-MPa, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as

specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 7 - GROUTING

1.1 Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

1.2 Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.


1.3 Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

1.4 Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

1.5 Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

1.6 Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

1.7 Place grout around anchors.

1.8 Cure placed grout.



PART 2 - SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


a. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses and exterior plants.

b. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. c. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. d. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. e. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. f. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. g. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities

and pits for buried utility structures.


1.1 Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

a. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

b. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

1.2 Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

1.3 Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

1.4 Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

1.5 Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

1.6 Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

a. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by COR. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

b. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 3 m (10 feet) in width and more than 9 m (30 feet) in length.

c. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by COR. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by COR, shall be without additional compensation.


1.7 Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

1.8 Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 0.76 cu. m (1 cu. yd.) for bulk excavation or 0.57 cu. m (3/4 cu. yd.) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted.

1.9 Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

1.10 Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

1.11 Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

1.12 Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.



a. Each type of plastic warning tape. b. Geotextile.

1.2 Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

a. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

b. Mechanical analysis, according to ASTM D 422, for each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

c. Sulfate and chloride ions, according to ASTM D 516 and 512 respectively, for each on-site borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill


1.1 Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.

1.2 Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.1 Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by COR and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

a. Notify COR not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. b. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without COR's written permission. c. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.

1.2 Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities no longer activated in conflict with new construction. Coordinate with the COR to shut off services if lines are active.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - SOIL MATERIALS

1.1 General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

1.2 Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 75 mm (3 inches) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

1.3 Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

a. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

1.4 Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 37.5-mm (1-1/2-inch) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a 0.075-mm (No. 200) sieve.

1.5 Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 37.5-mm (1-1/2-inch) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a 0.075-mm (No. 200) sieve.

1.6 Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 37.5-mm (1-1/2-inch) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a 0.075-mm (No. 200) sieve.

1.7 Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 25-mm (1-inch) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a 0.075-mm (No. 200) sieve.

1.8 Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 37.5-mm (1-1/2-inch) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a 2.36-mm (No. 8) sieve.


1.9 Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 25-mm (1-inch) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve.

1.10 Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

1.11 Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - GEOTEXTILES

1.1 Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

a. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. b. Grab Tensile Strength: 700 N (157 lbf); ASTM D 4632. c. Sewn Seam Strength: 630 N (142 lbf); ASTM D 4632. d. Tear Strength: 250 N (56 lbf); ASTM D 4533. e. Puncture Strength: 250 N (56 lbf); ASTM D 4833. f. Apparent Opening Size: 0.425-mm (No. 40) 0.250-mm (No. 60) 0.212-mm

(No. 70) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. g. Permittivity: 0.5 0.2 0.1 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. h. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

1.2 Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

a. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. b. Grab Tensile Strength: 1100 N (247 lbf); ASTM D 4632. c. Sewn Seam Strength: 990 N (222 lbf); ASTM D 4632. d. Tear Strength: 400 N (90 lbf); ASTM D 4533. e. Puncture Strength: 400 N (90 lbf); ASTM D 4833. f. Apparent Opening Size: 0.250-mm (No. 60) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. g. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. h. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - ACCESSORIES

1.1 Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 150 mm (6 inches) wide and 0.1 mm (4 mils) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 750 mm (30 inches) deep; colored as follows:

a. Red: Electric. b. Yellow: Gas, oil and dangerous materials. c. Orange: Telephone and other communications.


d. Blue: Water systems. e. Green: Sewer systems.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - PREPARATION

1.1 Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

1.2 Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing."

1.3 Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.

1.4 Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - DEWATERING

1.1 Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

1.2 Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

a. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

b. Install a dewatering system, specified in Division 2 Section "Dewatering," to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

c. Do not expose subgrade to atmospheric conditions for extended periods. If necessary, use temporary cover or a thin layer of concrete (i.e. mud mats).

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - EXPLOSIVES

1.1 Explosives: Do not use explosives.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - EXCAVATION, GENERAL

1.1 Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

a. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

b. Excavated side slopes for general excavation, structures, utility trenches shall not exceed 1.0 V to 2.0 H. Shoring and bracing shall be required for slopes exceeding 1.0 V to 2.0 H. For excavations below the water table, sheeting and shoring may also be necessary.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

1.1 Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 25 mm (1 inch). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

a. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. If necessary place a layer of binding concrete (i.e. mud mat). Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

b. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 150 to 300 mm (6 to 12 inches) above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

c. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 25 mm (1 inch). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

1.1 Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 6 - EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

1.1 Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

a. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.


1.2 Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 300 mm (12 inches) higher than top of pipe or conduit.

a. Clearance: 300 mm (12 inches) each side of pipe or conduit.

1.3 Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 100 mm (4 inches) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.

a. Excavate trenches 150 mm (6 inches) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 7 - SUBGRADE INSPECTION

1.1 Notify COR when excavations have reached required subgrade.

1.2 If COR determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

1.3 Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

a. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 5 km/h (3 mph).

b. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 13.6 tonnes (15 tons).

c. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by COR, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

1.4 Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by COR, without additional compensation.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 8 - UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

1.1 Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. 20 mm (3/4-inch) size stone or lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 17.2 MPa (2500 psi), may be used when approved by COR.

a. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by COR.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 9 - PRODUCT DATA SHEET 10 - STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

1.1 Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.


a. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 11 - BACKFILL

1.1 Place and compact backfill to required density in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

a. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

b. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. c. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. d. Removing concrete formwork. e. Removing trash, debris, compressible material, and organic soils. . f. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. g. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported

walls.

1.2 Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

1.3 Based on the Geotechnical Investigation by the Louis Berger Group, on site material may not be suitable for backfilling in most cases. Granular backfill meeting the following general criteria is typically acceptable for instances where controlled backfill is necessary:

• Maximum particle size 100mm (4 in.); • No more than 30% by weight retained on the 20mm (¾-in.) sieve; • No more than 40% by weight passing the #100 sieve; and, • No more than 12% by weight passing the #200 sieve, non-plastic.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 12 - UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

1.1 Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

1.2 Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

1.3 Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 450 mm (18 inches) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.4 Provide 100-mm (4-inch) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 750 mm (30 inches) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 100 mm (4 inches) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.

1.5 Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 25 mm (1 inch) in any dimension, to a height of 300 mm (12 inches) over the utility pipe or conduit.


a. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

1.6 Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.

1.7 Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

1.8 Install warning tape directly above utilities, 300 mm (12 inches) below finished grade, except 150 mm (6 inches) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 13 - SOIL FILL

1.1 Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

1.2 Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

a. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. b. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. c. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. d. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. e. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

1.3 Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 14 - SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

1.1 Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

a. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

b. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 15 - COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

1.1 Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 300 mm (12 inches) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 200 mm (8 inches) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

1.2 Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

1.3 Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557:


a. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 300 mm (12 inches) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

b. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 150 mm (6 inches) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

c. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 150 mm (6 inches) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

d. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 90 percent.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 16 - GRADING

1.1 General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

a. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. b. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required

surface tolerances.

1.2 Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

a. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 25 mm (1 inch). b. Walks: Plus or minus 25 mm (1 inch). c. Pavements: Plus or minus 13 mm (1/2 inch).

1.3 Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 13 mm (1/2 inch) when tested with a 3-m (10-foot) straightedge.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 17 - SUBBASE COURSES

1.1 Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

1.2 On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows:

a. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends only in locations directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

b. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. c. Place subbase course 150 mm (6 inches) or less in compacted thickness in a single

layer. d. Place subbase course that exceeds 150 mm (6 inches) in compacted thickness in

layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 150 mm (6 inches) thick or less than 75 mm (3 inches) thick.

e. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 18 - DRAINAGE COURSE

1.1 Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

1.2 On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

a. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

b. Place drainage course 150 mm (6 inches) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

c. Place drainage course that exceeds 150 mm (6 inches) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 150 mm (6 inches) thick or less than 75 mm (3 inches) thick.

d. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 19 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1.1 Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

1.2 Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by COR.

1.3 Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

a. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 186 sq. m (2000 sq. ft.) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.

b. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 30 m (100 feet) or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

c. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 46 m (150 feet) or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

1.4 When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 20 - PROTECTION

1.1 Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.


1.2 Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

a. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by COR; reshape and recompact.

1.3 Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

a. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 21 - DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

1.1 Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. Contractor may elect to coordinate with other Contractors working on other RFP Packages to transport surplus satisfactory soil to and/or from other contractor work areas as an option to importing from offsite sources or exporting off of the property.



PART 2 - SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2 This Section includes water-distribution treatment, well construction (if required), piping and specialties outside the building for the following:

a. Water services. b. Fire-service mains.


1.1 Fire-Service Main: Exterior fire-suppression-water piping.

1.2 Fire-Suppression-Water Piping: Interior fire-suppression-water piping.

1.3 Water-Distribution Piping: Interior domestic-water piping.

1.4 Water Service: Exterior domestic-water piping.

1.5 The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

a. PE: Polyethylene plastic. b. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


1.1 Operations and maintenance manuals shall describe proper procedures for the following: pressure and leak testing; flushing and disinfection: valve exercising, inspection and maintenance; backflow protection inspection and maintenance; liquid petroleum fuel storage and distribution systems operation and maintenance manuals, storm water system operations and maintenance manual; and sanitary system operations and maintenance manuals.

1.2 All existing wells shall be protected against surface and subsurface contamination in accordance with EPA-570/9-75-001,

1.3 Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

Manual of Individual Water Supply Systems.

1.4 Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

1.5 Maintenance Data: For valves, joints, pumps, agitators, filters, system controls, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.



1.1 Regulatory Requirements:

a. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

b. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

1.2 Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

1.3 Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.4 Comply with FM's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.

1.5 NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.

1.6 All existing wells shall be protected against surface and subsurface contamination in accordance with EPA-570/9-75-001,

1.7 NSF Compliance:

Manual of Individual Water Supply Systems.

a. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

b. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water.


1.9 Implement applicable provisions of the Quality Control program as established in Section 01401, "Contractor’s Quality Control.”


1.1 Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

a. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. b. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. c. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

1.2 During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

a. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.

b. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.


1.3 Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

1.4 Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

1.5 Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

1.6 Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

1.7 Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.8 Shipment of water treatment components in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.


1.1 Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving other occupied facilities unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

a. Notify COR not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. b. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without COR's written permission.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - PIPING MATERIALS

1.1 Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

1.1 PVC, Schedule 80 Pipe: ASTM D 1785.

a. PVC, Schedule 80 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467.

1.2 PVC, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 200, with bell end with gasket and spigot end.

a. Comply with UL 1285 for fire-service mains if indicated. b. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, Class 200, with bell-and-spigot or

double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. c. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron

standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.


1) Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - JOINING MATERIALS

1.1 Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining materials.

1.2 Transition Couplings:

a. Underground Piping, DN 40 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

b. Underground Piping, DN 50 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-type coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1.3 Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - CORROSION-PROTECTION ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

1.1 Encasement for Underground Metal Piping Fitting and Piping Specialties: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, PE film, 0.20-mm minimum thickness, tube or sheet. All metal surfaces shall be encased in PE film to prevent corrosion of valve boxes, ductile iron/cast iron fittings, etc.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - VALVES

1.1 AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves for Exterior Distribution Piping:

a. Nonrising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C500, gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with cast-iron or bronze double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Minimum Working Pressure: 1380 kPa. 2) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 3) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

1.2 UL/FM, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

a. UL/FM, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: UL 262, FM-approved iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, and inside screw.

1) Minimum Working Pressure: 1207 kPa. 2) End Connections: Flanged.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

1.1 Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, and approximately 125-mm- diameter barrel.

a. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

1.2 Indicator Posts: UL 789, FM-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 6 - CORPORATION VALVES AND CURB VALVES

1.1 Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800. Include bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material.

1.2 Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve boxes. Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over curb valve, and approximately 75-mm- diameter barrel.

a. Shutoff Rods: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 7 - RELIEF VALVES

1.1 Air-Release Valves: AWWA C512, hydromechanical device to automatically release accumulated air. Include 2070-kPa working-pressure design.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 8 - CONCRETE VAULTS

1.1 Cast-in-Place, Reinforced concrete vault, designed for A-16 load designation

1.2 Ladder: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel or polyethylene-encased steel steps.

1.3 Manhole Frame and Cover: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron traffic frame and cover.

a. Dimension: 610 mm (24-inch) minimum diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 9 - FREESTANDING FIRE HYDRANT HOUSE UNITS

1.22 Fire Hydrant Housing Units shall be acquired from Guardian Fire Equipment Company 3430 NW 38th Street Miami, FL 33142, USA. Contact is Robert K. Peterson, International Sales Manager, Email: [email protected]; Phone: 1-800-327-6584

mailto:[email protected]�


1.23 Fire Hydrant Housing Units shall consist and contain the following:

a. 1 each Fire Hydrant House model #8010 Hydrant house, pentagonal, galvanneal steel, 1550 mm w 1804 mm h. x 1550 mm d., with red enamel finish.

b. 6 each Single jacket hoses - model #3422-50, 3 792 kPa (Test)/1 724 kPa (Operating Pressure), 37.5 mm X 15 m, NST brass couplings.

c. 2 each Industrial nozzles, 3.7.5 mm, rough brass model #3724-RB. d. 1 each Hydrant wrench, model #8230. e. 4 each Common spanners, 37.5 mm, model #8215. f. 1 each Hydrant manifold model #6824-M, 100 mm X 62.5 mm X 62.5 mm with

two model #5245 factory set pressure regulating angle valves, reducers and caps. Pressure reducer set to reduce pressure to 690 kPa.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 10 - FLUSHING HYDRANTS

1.1 Description: Nonfreeze and drainable, with 1035-kPa minimum working-pressure rating and of length required for shutoff valve installation below frost line. Include one operating wrench for each unit.

B. Ground-Type Flushing Hydrants:

a. Outlet: One, with angle discharge. b. Hose Thread: DN 65, with NFPA 1963 external hose thread for use by local fire

department and cast-iron cap with brass chain. c. Barrel: Cast-iron or steel pipe. d. Valve: Bronze body with bronze-ball or plunger closure, and automatic draining. e. Inlet: DN 50 minimum. f. Hydrant Box: Cast iron with cover, for ground mounting.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 11 - ALARM DEVICES

1.1 Description: UL 753, FM approved, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and equipment.

1.2 Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully open position.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - EARTHWORK

1.1 Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - PIPING APPLICATIONS

1.1 General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

1.2 Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 Do not use flanges, unions, or keyed couplings for underground piping.

1.4 Underground Water-Service Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for each size range as specified:

a. DN 20 to DN 50: PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

b. DN 65 to DN 90: PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

c. DN 100: PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe; mechanical-joint, ductile-iron fittings; and gasketed joints.

d. DN 125 and DN 150: Use DN 150 PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe; mechanical-joint, ductile-iron fittings; and gasketed joints.

e. DN 200: PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe; mechanical-joint, ductile-iron fittings; and gasketed joints.

1.5 Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping: Use the following:

a. DN 100 to DN 200: PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe listed for fire-protection service; PVC fabricated or molded fittings of same class as pipe; and gasketed joints.

b. DN 250 and DN 300: PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe listed for fire-protection service; PVC fabricated or molded fittings of same class as pipe; and gasketed joints.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - VALVE APPLICATIONS

1.1 General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for DN 80 and larger underground installation. Use UL/FM, nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for DN 50 and smaller installation.

1.2 The following requirements apply:

a. Underground Valves, DN 80 and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, high-pressure, resilient-seated gate valves with valve box.

b. Underground Valves, DN 100 and Larger, for Indicator Posts: UL/FM, cast-iron, nonrising-stem gate valves with indicator post.

c. Water-Regulating Valves: Use for fire -service piping aboveground.


1) Pressure-Regulating Valves: To control water pressure.

d. Relief Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults.

1) Air-Release Valves: To release accumulated air.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - JOINT CONSTRUCTION

1.1 See Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

1.2 Make pipe joints according to the following:

a. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

b. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

1.1 See Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities – Basic Materials and Methods" for piping-system common requirements.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - PIPING INSTALLATION

1.1 Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.

a. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

1.2 Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to AWWA M23 and ASTM F 645.

a. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

1.3 Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 1000 mm, with top at least 300 mm below level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:

a. Under Driveways: With at least 1000 mm cover over top. b. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 1000 mm cover over top.

1.4 Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building water piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

a. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building water piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for


piping material. Make connections to building water piping systems when those systems are installed.

1.5 Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

1.6 Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

1.7 See Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.

1.8 See Division 13 Sections for fire-suppression water piping inside the building.

1.9 Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve in water supply to each post hydrant.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 6 - ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

1.1 Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems:

a. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23. b. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.

1.2 Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 7 - VALVE INSTALLATION

1.1 AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

1.2 UL/FM Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.

1.3 Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box.

1.4 Water-Regulating Valves: Install in vault at high points in the distribution system to prevent air build-up in the system.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 8 - VAULT CONSTRUCTION

1.1 See Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete vaults.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 9 - FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION

1.1 General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 10 - FLUSHING HYDRANT INSTALLATION

1.1 Install ground-type flushing hydrants with valve below frost line and provide for drainage. Install hydrant box flush with grade. Include separate gate valve or curb valve and restrained joints in supply piping.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 11 - ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION

1.1 General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground valves with valve box do not require supervision.

1.2 Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position.

a. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper-barrel section at target plate. Install switch, with toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post.

1.3 Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves and hydrant houses as follows:

a. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post. b. Hydrant House: Install padlock on locking hasp of each hydrant house.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 12 - CONNECTIONS

1.1 Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping.

1.2 See Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities – Basic Materials and Methods" for piping connections to valves and equipment.

1.3 Connect water-distribution piping to water storage system, and treatment systems.

1.4 Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic-water and fire-suppression piping.

1.5 Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

1.6 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


1.1 Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.


1.2 Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours.

a. Increase pressure in 350-kPa increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 kPa. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 1.89 L per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

1.3 Prepare reports of testing activities.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 14 - IDENTIFICATION

1.1 Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for underground warning tapes.

1.2 Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker, indicating plastic water-service piping, on main electrical meter panel. See Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for identifying devices.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 15 - CLEANING

1.1 Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

a. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

b. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.

c. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or as described below:

1) Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

3) After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

4) Submit water samples in sterile bottles to C.O.R and/or authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

1.2 Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.



PART 2 - SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWERAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2 This Section includes sanitary sewerage outside the building.


1.1 ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

1.2 PE: Polyethylene plastic.

1.3 PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.

1.2 Force-Main Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system operating pressure, but not less than 1035 kPa.


1.1 Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

1.2 Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.



a. Special pipe fittings. b. Backwater valves.

1.2 Shop Drawings: For the following:

a. Manholes: Include design calculations, and concrete design-mix report for cast-in-place manholes.

1.3 Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.


1.4 Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Indicate manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping. Information shall include distances between Manholes/cleanouts, pipe slope in %, inverts at structures and rim elevations of Manholes/cleanouts.

1.5 Field quality-control test reports.


1.1 Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.

1.2 Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.

1.3 Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Post or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

a. Notify COR not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. b. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without COR's written permission.



1.2 Implement applicable provisions of the Quality Control program as established in Section 01401, "Contractor’s Quality Control."



1.1 Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - PIPES AND FITTINGS

1.1 ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints.

a. Wall Thickness for DN80 to DN150: SDR 35. b. Wall Thickness for DN200 to DN300: SDR 42. c. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

1.2 PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150, for gasketed joints.

a. PVC Pressure Fittings: AWWA C907, for gasketed joints.


b. Gaskets for PVC Piping: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. c. Ductile-Iron, Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push-on joints. d. Gaskets for Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C111, rubber.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - PE FILM, PIPE ENCASEMENT

1.1 ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105; PE film, tube, or sheet; 0.2-mm thickness to encase pipes, bends, and other metal surfaces that are exposed.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - MANHOLES

1.1 Cast-in-Place Concrete Manholes: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16, heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances as necessary to support the NEC.

a. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent flotation. b. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 150- to 229-mm

total thickness, that match 610-mm- diameter frame and cover. c. Steps: Manufactured from deformed, 13-mm steel reinforcement rod complying

with ASTM A 615/A 615M and encased in polypropylene complying with ASTM D 4101. Include pattern designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor into sidewalls with steps at 300- to 400-mm intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 1500 mm deep.

1.2 Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron castings designed for heavy-duty service. Include 610-mm ID by 178- to 229-mm riser with 100-mm minimum width flange, and 660-mm- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering "SANITARY SEWER" cast into cover.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - CONCRETE

1.1 General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:

a. Cement: ASTM C150 Type V, Sulfate Resistant Cement, Type V for concrete placed below and exposed to the groundwater table.

b. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II for concrete not below or exposed to the groundwater table.

c. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. d. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. e. Water: Potable.

1.2 Portland Cement Design Mix: 27.6 MPa minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio.

a. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. b. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 400, deformed steel.


1.3 Structure Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 27.6 MPa minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

a. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

1) Invert Slope: 1 percent through manhole.

b. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

1) Slope: 8 percent.

1.4 Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 20.7 MPa minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio.

a. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. b. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 400, deformed steel.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - PROTECTIVE COATINGS

1.1 Description: One- or two-coat, coal-tar epoxy; 0.38-mm minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated; factory or field applied to the following surfaces:

a. Concrete Manholes: On interior surface. b. Manhole Frames and Covers: On surfaces that will be exposed to sewer gases.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 6 - BACKWATER VALVES

1.1 Gray-Iron Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, gray-iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat.

a. Horizontal Type: With swing check valve and hub-and-spigot ends. b. Combination Horizontal and Manual Gate-Valve Type: With swing check valve,

integral gate valve, and hub-and-spigot ends. c. Terminal Type: With bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 7 - CLEANOUTS

1.1 PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.



PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - EARTHWORK

1.1 Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - IDENTIFICATION

1.1 Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installing green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures.

a. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.


1.1 General: Include watertight joints.

1.2 Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated.

1.3 Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following:

a. DN100 and DN150: ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or gaskets and gasketed joints.

b. DN200 and DN250: ABS, SDR 42, sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or gaskets and gasketed joints.

c. DN300: ABS, SDR 42, sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or gaskets and gasketed joints.

1.4 Force-Main Piping: Use the following:

a. DN50 to DN200: PVC pressure pipe, PVC pressure fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS

1.1 Special Pipe Couplings: Use where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods.

a. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main joints. Include PE film, pipe encasement for metal surfaces exposed to soil.

1.2 Special Pipe Fittings: Use where indicated. Include PE film, pipe encasement for ductile iron bends and fittings.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - INSTALLATION, GENERAL

1.1 General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.

1.2 Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.

1.3 Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

1.4 Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

1.5 Extend sanitary sewerage piping and connect to building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.

1.6 Install PVC force-main piping according to AWWA M23.

1.7 Install force-main piping between and connect to packaged sewage pump station outlet and termination point indicated.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

1.1 General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.

1.2 Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities – Basic Material and Methods" for basic piping joint construction and installation.

1.3 ABS Pipe and Fittings: As follows:

a. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. b. Install according to ASTM D 2321.

1.4 PVC Pressure Pipe and Fittings: Join and install according to AWWA M23.

1.5 System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, unless otherwise indicated.

1.6 Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.

1.7 Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 6 - MANHOLE INSTALLATION

1.1 General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

1.2 Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.

1.3 Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 76 mm above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 Construct cast-in-place manholes.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 7 - CONCRETE PLACEMENT

1.1 Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 8 - BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION

1.1 Install horizontal units in piping where indicated.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 9 - CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

1.1 Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use PVC pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and PVC pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

1.2 Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 450 by 450 by 300 mm deep. Set with tops 25 mm above surrounding grade.

1.3 Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 10 - CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS

1.1 Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

a. Close open ends of piping with at least 200-mm- thick, brick masonry bulkheads. b. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other

acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.


1.1 Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.


a. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. b. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris.

1.2 Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 600 mm of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

a. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. b. Defects requiring correction include the following:

1) Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.

2) Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.

3) Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. 4) Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. 5) Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

c. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

d. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

1.3 Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. b. Test completed piping systems. c. Submit separate reports for each test. d. Perform tests as follows:

1) Sanitary Sewerage: Perform hydrostatic test.

a) Allowable leakage is maximum of 4.6 L per millimeter of nominal pipe size per kilometer of pipe, during 24-hour period.

b) Close openings in system and fill with water. c) Purge air and refill with water. d) Disconnect water supply. e) Test and inspect joints for leaks.

2) Sanitary Sewerage: Perform air test according to UNI-B-6. 3) Force Main: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports, and

anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than one and one-half times maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 1035 kPa.

a) PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

e. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969M. f. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. g. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is

within allowances specified.END OF SECTION 02530


PART 2 -

PART 1 -

SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS

1.1 SUMMARY

GENERAL


a. Concrete pavers set in bituminous setting bed. b. Edge restraints for unit pavers and stabilized stone dust surfacing

1.3 Related Sections include the following:

a. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for compacted subgrade and subbase course, if any, under unit pavers.

b. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete base course under unit pavers and for flush stone curbs.

c. Division 2 Section "Hot Mix Asphalt Paving" for asphalt base course under unit pavers.

d. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit pavers with elastomeric sealants.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 -

1.1 Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.

SUBMITTALS


a. Concrete Pavers b. Bituminous setting materials. c. Edge restraints. d. Asphalt tack coat

1.3 Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136.

1.4 Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

a. Furnish no less than 4 individual concrete pavers of each type, color and finish of concrete unit paver indicated.

b. Exposed edge restraints sample 305mm in length with one stake c. 4 kilo sample of sand for COR approval



1.1 Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.2 Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. Pedestrian and vehicular pavers shall be installed under multiple contracts. Color and material selection to be approved by COR.

1.3 Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, including same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as indicated:

a. Construct 2m x 2m mockups for each paving type in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by COR.

b. Notify COR seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

c. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. d. Obtain COR 's approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation. e. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard

for judging the completed Work. f. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. g. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time

of Substantial Completion.


1.5 Implement applicable provisions of the Quality Control program as established in Section 01401, "Contractor Quality Control."


1.1 Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or contamination from earth and other materials.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

a. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from steel strapping.

1.2 Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

1.3 Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.

1.4 Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers.



1.1 Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.

1.2 Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Comply with the following requirements:

a. Apply asphalt adhesive when ambient temperature is above 10 deg C and when temperature has not been below 2 deg C for 12 hours immediately before application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains excess moisture.

b. Install bituminous setting bed only when atmospheric temperature is above 4 deg C and when base is dry.

SCHEDULE 1 -


PRODUCTS

1.1 Vehicular Concrete Pavers: Solid paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal-weight aggregates in sizes and shapes indicated.

CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS

Type 1, 2, 3

a. Color and Finish: Brown and Buff with light textured finish, beveled edges, and 1.5mm spacer on all 4 sides.

b. Size: 100 x 200 mm and 150 x 230 mm and approximately 80 mm thick.

1.2 Pedestrian Concrete Pavers: Solid paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal-weight aggregates in sizes and shapes indicated.

Type 1, 3, 4

a. Color and Finish: Brown and Buff with light textured finish, beveled edges, and 1.5mm spacer on all 4 sides.

b. Size: 300 x 600 mm and 100 x 200 mm and approximately 50 mm thick.


1.1 Plastic Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's heavy duty, standard triangular PVC extrusions designed to serve as edge restraints for unit pavers; rigid type for straight edges and flexible type for curved edges, with pipe connectors and 9.5-mm diameter by 300-mm- long steel spikes. Size of edging is as follows:

ACCESSORIES

a. 45 mm high by 89 mm wide. b. 79 mm high by 241 mm wide.

1.2 Steel Edge Restraints: Painted commercial steel edging with loops pressed from or welded to face to receive stakes at 900 mm o.c., and steel stakes 380 mm long for each loop. Size of edging is as follows:


a. 4.8 mm thick by 100 mm high.

b. 6.4 mm thick by 125 mm high.

1.3 Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.


1.1 Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.

AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS

1.2 The aggregate material for base shall be specified , provided and installed under Division 2 Section: EARTHWORK

1.3 Geotextile: Woven or nonwoven geotextile manufactured from polyester or polypropylene fibers, with a permeability rating 10 times greater than that of soil on which paving is founded and an apparent opening size small enough to prevent passage of fines from leveling course into graded aggregate of base course below.

1.4 Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing 1.18-mm sieve and no more than 10 percent passing 0.075-mm sieve.

a. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.


BITUMINOUS SETTING BED

A. Asphalt cement to be used in the bituminous setting bed shall conform to ASTM D 3381. Viscosity grade shall be A.C. 10 or A.C. 20.

B. Fine aggregate to be used in the bituminous setting bed shall be clean, hard sand with durable

particles and free from adherent coating, lumps of clay, alkali salts, and organic matter. Aggregate shall be uniformly graded from "coarse" to "fine" with 100 percent by weight passing the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve and shall meet the gradation requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136.

C. Fine aggregate shall be dried and shall be combined with hot asphalt cement, and the mix shall

be heated to approximately 300 degrees Fahrenheit (165 degrees Centigrade) at an asphalt plant. The approximate proportion of materials shall be 7 percent cement asphalt and 93 percent fine aggregate. Each ton of material shall be apportioned by weight in the approximate ratio of 145 pounds (65.8 kg) asphalt to 1,855 pounds (841.4 kg) sand. The Contractor shall determine the exact proportions to produce the best possible mixture for construction of the bituminous setting bed to meet specified requirements.

2.5

ASPHALTIC PRIMER

A. Primer for base beneath bituminous setting bed and asphalt block pavers shall be an emulsified asphalt rapid setting type conforming to AASHTO M 140, Grade RS-1, or AASHTO M 208, Grade CRS-1.


2.6

NEOPRENE-MODIFIED ASPHALT ADHESIVE

A. Neoprene modified asphalt adhesive shall meet the following requirements:

1. Mastic (asphalt adhesive):

a. Solids (base) content by volume = 75+ 1 percent. b. Weight = 8.0 to 8.5 pounds/gallon (1.05 to 0.97 kg./liter). c. Solvent vehicle = Varsol [over 100oF (37oC) flash].

2. Base (2 percent neoprene, 10 percent fibers, 88 percent asphalt):

a. Melting point (ASTM D 36) = 200oF (93oC) minimum. b. Penetration at 77oF (25oC) 100 gram load 5 second (0.1 mm) = 23 to 27. c. Ductility (ASTM D 113 at 77oF (25oC), 5 cm/minute) = 125 cm, minimum.

2.7

SURFACE SEALANT FOR PAVERS

A. Surface sealant for all pavers shall be a clear, non yellowing, non staining water / oil repellant. Material must have 5 year warranty and comply with all AIM/VOC regulations

SCHEDULE 2 -


EXECUTION

1.1 Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

EXAMINATION

a. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations. Examine areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces and horizontal waterproofing. Proceed with installation only after protection is in place.

3.2

EDGING

A. Plastic edging strips shall be installed at locations indicated on the Contract Documents. Where required, edging shall be cut square and accurately to required length.

1. Plastic edging shall be securely staked in required position. Stakes shall be driven every

(25 mm) in straight runs and into every support section in curved sections.

2. Adjacent lengths shall be attached using manufacturer's standard connection pipe according to manufacturer's published instructions.


3. Edging shall be set plumb and vertical at required line and grade. Straights sections shall not be wavy; curved sections shall be smooth and shall have no kinks or sharp bends.

3.3

ACCEPTABILITY OF CONCRETE BASE

A. Contractor shall examine the concrete base provided, installed and paid for under the work of the Division 2 Section, CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT to determine its adequacy to receive concrete pavers and setting bed. Concrete shall have fully cured prior to the work of installing concrete pavers. Evidence of inadequate base shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner’s Representative and shall be corrected by the Contractor as directed by the COR at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Start of work of this Division 2 Section, UNIT PAVERS, shall constitute acceptance of concrete

base.

3.4

AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

A. Aggregate material for base beneath concrete pavers shall be to the depth indicated on the Contract Documents. Base shall be as specified and paid for under the Division 2 Section, EARTHWORK, of this Specification.

3.5

BITUMINOUS SETTING BED

A. The surface of the concrete base shall receive an asphalt prime coat before laying bituminous setting bed. Prime coat shall be applied at rate that will leave bituminous residue of 5 to 7 gallons per 100 square yards after evaporation of vehicle. Base surface shall be dry and clean when prime coat is applied. Bituminous setting bed shall not be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from prime coat.

B. Bituminous setting bed over concrete base shall be specified under Division 2 Section HOT

MIX ASHALT PAVING C. The setting bed shall be rolled with a power roller to a nominal depth of 19.05 mm while still

hot. The setting bed thickness shall be adjusted so that when the concrete pavers are placed and rolled, the top surface of the pavers will be at the required finished grade.

D. A coating of neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive shall be applied by mopping, squeegee, or

troweling over the top surface of the bituminous setting bed so as to provide continuous bond under the pavers.

b. If adhesive is trowel-applied, trowel shall be serrated type with serrations not to

exceed 1/16 inch (1.59 mm).

3.6 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work.

1.2 Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures.


1.3 Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.

a. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.

1.4 Joint Pattern: As indicated, or match existing unit paver joint pattern.

1.5 Tolerances: Do not exceed 0.8-mm unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 3 mm in 3 m from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

1.6 Tolerances: Do not exceed 1.6-mm unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 3 mm in 600 mm and 6 mm in 3 m from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

1.7 Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths indicated. Provide joint filler as backing for sealant-filled joints where indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

1.8 Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.

1.9 Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.

a. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver installation.

b. For metal edge restraints with top edge exposed, drive stakes at least 25 mm below top edge.

c. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.7

JOINT TREATMENT

A. Joint filler shall be swept dry into the joints between pavers until the joints are completely filled. Surface shall be swept clean. Swept surface shall than be thoroughly dampened with a low-volume fine spray of water.

1. Sweep sand into paver joints until joints are filled solid. Fog lightly with water and

repeat a minimum of three times or until joints are compacted and full.

2. Prior to acceptance, the paved area shall be flooded with water to assure that there are no depressions. Pavers with top surfaces greater than 1.6 mm above or below adjacent pavers shall be removed and reset. Remove and reset pavers as required until surface is true to line and grade. Refill sand joints as necessary until all joints are filled to finish grade.

B. Concrete paving shall be kept damp by intermittent spraying for three days, minimum, to

effectively cure the joints.


3.8

CLEANING OF CONCRETE PAVER SURFACES

A. After completion of concrete paving, surfaces shall be carefully cleaned, removing all dirt, excess filler, and stains.

B. Clean pavers using an approved masonry cleaner and soft bristle brush.

3.9

APPLICATION OF SURFACE SEALANT OF CONCRETE PAVER SURFACES

A. Seal pavement surface as follows:

1. Apply surface sealer to installed, thoroughly cleaned paved areas using a low pressure airless sprayer, brush or roller in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply material in quantities sufficient to saturate the surface pavement and not less than 1 gallon per 450 square feet.

2. Contractor shall take safety precautions in order to avoid all skin contact with the sealer,

keep the sealer away from all heat sources or flames, and maintain adequate ventilation to avoid any concentration of sealer vapors in the work area. Vapors may ignite explosively and may travel along the ground by ventilation to ignition sources far from the product.

3. Sealed, paved surfaces shall display no color difference from the unsealed surface and no surface sheen. Paved areas that do exhibit these qualities after



PART 2 -

PART 1 -

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES


GENERAL


SUMMARY

a. Steel doors. b. Steel door frames. c. Stainless-steel doors and frames. d. Sidelight or borrowed-light frames. e. Hollow-metal panels and frames. f. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies. g. Louvers in doors.


a. Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry Assemblies” for building anchors into and grouting frames in masonry construction.

b. Division 5 Section “Formed-Metal Fabrications” for customized hollow-metal work other than doors, panels, and frames.

c. Division 8 Section “Flush Wood Doors” for wood doors installed in steel frames. d. Division 8 Section “Sound Control Doors” for acoustical doors with an STC rating

of 43 to 52. e. Division 8 Sections for door hardware and weather stripping. f. Division 8 Section “Glazing” for glass in doors and sidelights or borrowed lights. g. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for steel stud and gypsum board

partitions. h. Division 9 Section “Painting” for field painting primed doors and frames.


1.1 Uncoated steel sheet thickness is indicated as the minimum thickness according to HMMA 803, Steel Tables.

DEFINITIONS

1.2 Metallic-coated steel sheet thickness is indicated as the minimum thickness of the uncoated base metal.

1.3 Stainless-steel sheet thicknesses are indicated as the specified thickness for which over and under thickness tolerances apply according to ASTM A 480/A 480M.



1.1 Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes for each type of door and frame specified.

SUBMITTALS

1.2 Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, dimensions of profiles and hardware preparation, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, location and thickness of lead lining, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessories.

a. Electric Hardware Devices: Indicated routing of electrical conduit for electric hardware devices.

b. Security System Components: Indicate all cutouts required to metal door and frame components to accept security system components.

1.3 Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

a. Coordinate glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

1.4 Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of doors certifying that products furnished comply with or exceed the acceptance criteria of ANSI A250.4 for Level A doors.

1.5 Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to comply with design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.


1.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing custom steel doors and frames similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.2 Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

a. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. b. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested

assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

c. Temperature-Rise Rating: If indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 250 deg C maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.



1.1 Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.


1.2 Inspect doors and frames, on delivery, for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are approved by COR; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

1.3 Store doors and frames under cover at building site. Place units on minimum 100-mm-high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 6-mm spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.

SCHEDULE 1 -


PRODUCTS

1.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide doors and frame by one of the following:

MANUFACTURERS

a. Steel Doors and Frames:

1) Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2) Ceco Door Products. 3) Curries Company. 4) Deronde Products, Inc. 5) Firedoor Corporation of Florida. 6) Fleming: S. W. Fleming Limited. 7) Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. 8) Tex-Steel Corporation.

b. Stainless-Steel Doors and Frames:

1) Curries Company. 2) Deronde Products, Inc. 3) Fleming: S. W. Fleming Limited. 4) Next Door Company. 5) Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. 6) Tex-Steel Corporation.


1.1 Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, CS (commercial steel), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

MATERIALS

1.2 Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, CS (commercial steel), Type B.


1.3 Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, CS (commercial steel), Type B; with Z180 zinc (galvanized) or ZF180 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating.

1.4 Stainless-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 666, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304.

1.5 Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard units. Where items are to be built to exterior walls, zinc coat according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.

1.6 Filler: Sound deadening and heat-retarding mineral fiber insulating material. At doors required to have temperature rise rating provide mineral fiberboard core.

1.7 Glazing and Glazing Felt: Clear Wire Glass: Type II, Class 1, Form 1, with pattern M1 (diamond) wire mesh where shown.

a. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass: Provide wire glass products that are identical to those tested per ASTM E163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 Lead Lining: Rolled sheet lead conforming to requirements of FS QQ-L-201, Grade C (Chemical Lead) in sizes and thicknesses indicated.


1.1 General: Provide flush-design doors, 44 mm thick, of seamless hollow construction, unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile edges. Exterior doors to be IGGA (1.5mm) galvanized interior doors 18 GA (1.2mm).

DOORS

a. Visible joints or seams around glazed or louvered panel inserts are permitted. b. For single-acting swing doors, bevel both vertical edges 3 mm in 50 mm. c. For double-acting swing doors, round vertical edges with 54-mm radius. d. Exterior doors to have flush tops.

1.2 Metallic Core Construction: Provide the following core construction welded to both door faces:

a. Continuous Truss-Form Inner Core: 0.33-mm- thick steel reinforcement spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 75 mm o.c. vertically and horizontally.

1.3 Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.

1.4 Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated.

1.5 Top and Bottom Channels: Spot weld metal channel not less than thickness of face sheet to face sheets not more than 150 mm o.c.

a. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with inverted horizontal channels of same material as face sheet so flanges of channels are even with bottom and top edges of face sheets.


b. For exterior doors, close bottom edge with metallic-coated steel closing channel and top edge with filler channel of same material, so webs of channels are flush with bottom and top door edges.

1.6 Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcing plates from the same material as door to comply with the following:

a. Hinges and Pivots: 4.2 mm thick by 38 mm wide by 150 mm longer than hinge, secured by not less than six spot welds.

b. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: 2.3 mm thick. c. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: 1.3 mm thick.

1.7 Interior Doors: Fabricate face sheets of doors from two 1.06-mm- thick, cold-rolled, stretcher-leveled steel sheets and other metal components from hot- or cold-rolled steel sheets.

1.8 Exterior Steel Doors: Fabricate face sheets of doors from two 1.3-mm-thick, stretcher - leveled, metallic-coated steel sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of doors to permit entrapped moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

1.9 Stainless-Steel Doors: Fabricate face sheets of doors from two 1.3-mm-thick, stainless-steel sheets permanently and continuously bonded to nonmetallic cores or welded to rigid, internal stainless-steel core.

a. Internal Construction: Vertically reinforced with 1.3-mm-thick, stainless-steel sheet sections, spaced not more than 150 mm o.c., extended full-door height, and spot welded to both face sheets at not more than 125 mm o.c.

b. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with 1.3-mm-thick, stainless-steel horizontal channels spot welded a maximum of 150 mm o.c. to door faces.

1) For exterior doors, close bottom edge with minimum 1.3-mm-thick, stainless-steel closing channel and top edge with same thickness of stainless-steel filler channel, so webs of channels are flush with bottom and top door edges. Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of doors to permit entrapped moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

1.10 Electrical Requirements: Provisions for installation of electrical items specified elsewhere; arrange so that wiring can be readily removed and replaced.

a. Security System Components: Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required for metal doors to accept security system components.

1.11 Doors With Electric Hinges: General: Provide with metal conduit raceway to permit wiring from electric hinge to other electric door hardware.

a. Hinge Location: Center for doors less than 2286 mm or 2nd hinge from door bottom for doors greater than 2286 mm; top or bottom electric hinge locations shall not be permitted.



1.1 Provide panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for doors.

PANELS


1.1 Fabricate frames of full-welded unit construction, with corners mitered, reinforced, and continuously welded full width of mitre. Knockdown frames are acceptable for drywall construction only.

FRAMES

a. For exterior use, form frames from 1.9-mm-thick, metallic-coated steel sheets galvanized.

b. For interior use, form frames from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet of the following thicknesses:

1) Openings up to and Including 1200 mm Wide: 1.5 mm. 2) Openings More than 1200 mm Wide: 1.9 mm.

c. For stainless-steel doors, form frames from 1.6-mm-thick, stainless-steel sheets with No. 4 finish.

d. Lead Lined Frames: 1.519 mm thick steel.

1.2 Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate from same material as frame. Minimum thickness of steel reinforcing plates for the following hardware:

a. Hinges and Pivots: 4.2 mm thick by 38 mm wide by 150 mm longer than hinge, secured by not less than six spot welds.

b. Strikes, Flush Bolts, and Closers: 2.3 mm. c. Surface-Mounted Hold-Open Arms and Panic Devices: 2.3 mm.

1.3 Mullions and Transom Bars: Provide closed or tubular mullions and transom bars where indicated. Fasten mullions and transom bars at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Reinforce joints between frame members with concealed clip angles or sleeves of same metal and thickness as frame.

a. Provide false head member to receive lower ceiling where frames extend to finish ceilings of different heights.

1.4 Head Reinforcement: Where installed in masonry, leave vertical mullions in frames open top for grouting.

1.5 Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

1.6 Jamb Anchors: Weld jamb anchors to frames near hinges and directly opposite on strike jamb as required to secure frames to adjacent construction.

a. Masonry Construction: Adjustable, flat, corrugated, or perforated T-shaped anchors to suit frame size; formed of same material as frame; not less than 1.3 mm


thick; with leg not less than 50 mm wide by 250 mm long. Furnish at least the number of anchors per jamb according to the following frame heights:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 1500 mm in height. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 1500 to 2250 mm in height. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 2250 to 2400 mm in height. 4) One additional anchor per jamb for each 600 mm or fraction thereof more

than 2400 mm in height.

b. Metal-Stud Partitions: Insert type with notched clip to engage metal stud, welded to back of frames, formed of same material as frame, not less than 1.0 mm thick. Provide at least the number of anchors for each jamb according to the following heights:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 1500 mm in height. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 1500 to 2250 mm in height. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 2250 to 2400 mm in height. 4) One additional anchor per jamb for each 600 mm or fraction thereof more

than 2400 mm in height.

c. In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Anchor frame jambs with minimum 9-mm-diameter concealed bolts into expansion shields or inserts 150 mm from top and bottom and 650 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Reinforce frames at anchor locations. Except for fire-rated openings, apply removable stop to cover anchor bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

1.7 Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, formed of same material as frame, 1.7 mm thick, as follows:

a. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners, welded to bottom of jambs and mullions.

b. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable type with extension clips, allowing not less than 50-mm height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

1.8 Head Anchors: Provide two head anchors for frames more than 1066 mm wide and mounted in steel-stud walls.

1.9 Head Strut Supports: Provide 9-by-50-mm vertical steel struts extending from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

1.10 Structural Reinforcing Metals: Provide as part of frame assembly, where indicated at mullions, transoms, or other locations to be built into frame.

1.11 Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 1200 mm wide in masonry wall openings, provide continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, 2.3 mm thick for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at head.


1.12 Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

1.13 Rubber Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stop in strike jamb to receive three silencers on single-door frames and drill head jamb stop to receive two silencers on double-door frames. Install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction.

1.14 Plaster Guards: Provide 0.4-mm-thick plaster guards or dust-cover boxes of same material as frame, welded to frame at back of hardware cutouts to close off interior of openings and prevent mortar or other materials from obstructing hardware operation.

1.15 X-Ray Door Frame Struts and Lead Linings:

a. Struts: Provide vertical steel struts, 9.525 mm x 50 mm extended from top of frame at each jamb to supporting structural construction above, unless frame is set in masonry or attached directly to concrete. Bend top of struts at a right angle and attach to supporting structural construction above by bolting. Use inserts or expansion anchors into supporting structural construction above. Provide bolted attachment of struts to frame at jambs to permit height adjustment during installation. Adapt jamb anchor clips at struts to permit adjustment.

b. Lead Lining: All X-ray door frames shall be provided with a minimum 25 mm x 50 mm x 4.76 mm continuous structural angle welded to the full length of the hinge, head, and strike jambs. The door frame and structural angle shall then receive a single 1.5 mm thickness of lead sheet having a width to provide an effective lead lap with the lead of the adjoining wall construction lead shielding materials. Lead sheet shall be factory installed as a continuous lining formed to the contour of the door frame and structural angle and around areas prepared to receive hardware. Lead lining shall be held in place with retaining clip devises.


1.1 Door Louvers: Fabricate louvers and mount flush into doors without overlapping moldings on surface of door face sheets. Provide internal support as recommended by louver manufacturer. Prime paint steel louvers after fabrication.

LOUVERS

a. Interior Louvers: Sightproof, stationary type, constructed of inverted Y-shaped blades formed of same material as door.

1) Steel: 0.8 mm thick. 2) Stainless Steel: 0.95 mm thick.


1.1 Provide stops and moldings around solid, glazed, and louvered panels where indicated.

STOPS AND MOULDINGS

1.2 Form fixed stops and moldings integral with frame, unless otherwise indicated.


1.3 Provide removable stops and moldings where indicated or required, formed of 0.8-mm-thick steel sheets matching steel frames. Secure with countersunk flat or oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 300 mm o.c. Form corners with butted hairline joints.

1.4 Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glass or panel and type of installation indicated.


1.1 Fabricate doors and frames rigid, neat in appearance, and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer’s plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.

FABRICATION

a. Fabricate doors to comply with acceptance criteria of ANSI A250.4 for a Level A door.

1.2 For doors with metallic core constructions, weld cores to both door face sheets.

1.3 Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 Thermal-Rated (insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors and frames fabricated as thermal-insulating assemblies and tested according to STM C 236 or ASTM C 976.

a. Provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-factor of 1.7 W/sq. m x K, unless otherwise indicated.

1.5 Sound-Rated (Acoustical) Assemblies: Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame assemblies fabricated as sound-reducing type, tested according to ASTM E 1408, and classified according to ASTM E 413.

a. Provide acoustical assemblies with STC sound ratings of 33 or better, unless otherwise indicated.

1.6 Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware, including cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to final hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSIA115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

a. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.

Locate hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, according to HMMA 831, “Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.”



1.1 Form glazed light frames to the profiles shown. Provide anchors at jambs same as for door frames. Provide closed mullion sections same as for door frames. Fabricate from 1.519 mm thick steel for interior work.

GLAZED LIGHT FRAMES

1.2 Miter, fit, and weld corners of panel moldings for glass panels in sidelights and borrowed lights to form continuous frame around panels. Provide non-removable panel moldings on the exterior. Secure removable moldings with not less than No. 6 x 32 Phillips oval-head countersunk machine screws at 300 mm on center.

1.3 Provide continuous felt strips cemented in place, on all bed and stop surfaces for interior light frames to be glazed so that at no time does metal touch glass.

a. Glaze light frames with wire glass.


1.1 Provide special bullet resistant acoustical doors fabricated from sheet steel where shown with Z180 zinc (galvanized) or ZF180 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or scheduled, compete with frames. Provide a Sound Transmission Class of 49, as determined in accordance with ASTM E413, for each door, threshold and frame assembly when installed. The door and frame assembly shall be designed to withstand a commercially loaded handgun or rifle ammunition, including armor piercing ammunition, having a muzzle velocity not to exceed 3,500 feet per second and maximum energy of 5,250 foot pounds. The assembly shall be complete with necessary gasketing, thresholds and sound seals to achieve the specified STC rating and bullet resistance. Doors shall be designed for use with standard builder’s hardware as scheduled.

BULLET RESISTANT ACOUSTICAL DOORS

1.2 Basis of Design: Moduline APR Type Single Leaf Personnel Doors Modified to comply with the requirements; Industrial Acoustics Company, or equal.


1.1 Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for cleaning, treating, priming, and when specified, finishing.

FINISHES, GENERAL

1.2 Finish products specified in this Section after fabrication.


1.1 Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.

METALLIC-COATED STEEL FINISHES

a. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.


1.2 Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.02 mm.

a. Shop Primer: Manufacturer’s of fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, primer complying with ANSI A 224.1 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for zinc-coated steel; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.


1.1 Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, “Solvent Cleaning”; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning,” or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning.”

STEEL SHEET FINISHES

1.2 Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.02 mm.

a. Shop Primer: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, corrosion-inhibiting, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer complying with ANSI A 224.1 acceptance criteria; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.


1.1 Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured polished finish indicated, free cross scratches. Run gain with long dimension of each piece.

STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

a. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish. b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

SCHEDULE 2 -


EXECUTION

1.1 General: Install doors and frames according to DHI A115.IG and manufacturer’s written instructions.

INSTALLATION

1.2 Frames: Install frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of size and profile indicated.


a. Set masonry anchorage devices where required for securing frames to in-place concrete or masonry construction.

1) Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location according to details on Shop Drawings and anchorage device manufacturer’s written instructions. Leave drilled holes rough, not reamed, and free of dust and debris.

b. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of masonry anchorage devices and machine screws, if so indicated on Shop Drawings.

c. Placing Frames: Set frames accurately in position; plumb; align, and brace securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

1) At existing concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.

2) At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. 3) Field splice only at approved locations. Weld, grind, and finish as required

to conceal evidence of splicing on exposed faces. 4) Remove spreader bars from each frame only after frame is properly set and

secured.

1.3 Doors: Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in their respective frames, with the following clearances:

a. Jambs and Head: 2 mm. b. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 3 mm. c. Bottom: 9 mm, if no threshold or carpet. d. Bottom: 3 mm, at threshold or carpet.

1.4 Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances as specified in NFPA 80.

1.5 Smoke Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 105.


1.1 Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items just before final inspection. leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

1.2 Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.

1.3 Stainless-Steel Touchup: Immediately after erection, smooth any abraded areas of stainless steel and polish to match undamaged finish.



PART 2 -

PART 1 -

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS


GENERAL


SUMMARY

a. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer, and plastic-laminate faces. b. Hollow-core doors with wood-veneer, and plastic-laminate faces. c. Shop priming flush wood doors.


1.1 Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction] and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

SUBMITTALS

1.2 Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

a. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. b. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. c. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. d. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. e. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.

1.3 Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for the following:

a. Plastic-Laminate Door Faces: Show the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

b. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for stained and opaque finishes.

1.4 Samples for Verification:

a. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 200 by 250 mm (8 by 10 inches), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.

b. Corner sections of doors, approximately 200 by 250 mm (8 by 10 inches), with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.

c. Plastic laminate, 150 mm (6 inches) square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected.


d. Corner sections of plastic-laminate-clad doors, approximately 200 by 250 mm (8 by 10 inches), for each color, texture, and pattern selected.

e. Louver blade and frame sections, 150 mm (6 inches) long, for each material and finish specified.

f. Frames for light openings, 150 mm (6 inches) long, for each material, type, and finish required.


1.1 Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.2 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."

a. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

1.3 Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

a. Test Pressure: After five minutes into the test, the neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 1000 mm or less above the sill.

b. Oversize, Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide oversize fire door label or certificate of inspection, from a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, stating that doors comply with requirements of design, materials, and construction.

c. Temperature-Rise Rating: At exit enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 250 deg C maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.

1.4 Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1.


1.1 Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.


1.2 Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting package and deliver as required.

1.3 Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


1.1 Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PROJECT CONDITIONS


1.2 Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 16 and 32 deg C and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period.


1.1 Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 6.4 mm in a 1067-by-2134-mm section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.25 mm in a 75-mm span.

WARRANTY

a. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

b. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion:

1) Solid-Core Exterior Doors: Five years. 2) Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 3) Hollow-Core Interior Doors: Two years.

SCHEDULE 1 -


PRODUCTS

1.1 Doors for Transparent Finish:

DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

a. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces). b. Species and Cut: Quarter sawn mahogany, or match species in surrounding area or

area served. c. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. d. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center balance match. e. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by

mullions. f. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building.

Corridor door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 3 m or more. g. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each

separate room or area of building. h. Blueprint Matching: Where indicated, provide doors with faces produced from

same flitches as adjacent wood paneling and arranged to provide blueprint matching with wood paneling. Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork."

i. Stiles: Applied wood-veneer edges of same species as faces and covering edges of faces.


1.2 Doors for Opaque Finish:

a. Grade: Custom. b. Faces for Interior Doors: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.


1.1 Use: Typical throughout entire compound.

SOLID-CORE DOORS

1.2 Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements:

a. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. b. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to

eliminate through-bolting hardware.

1) 125-mm top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. 2) 125-mm bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have

kick, mop, or armor plates. 3) 125-mm midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

c. Provide doors with either glued-block or structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated.

1.3 Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:

a. Core: Either glued or nonglued block or structural composite lumber. b. Construction: Five plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.

1.4 Interior Plastic-Laminate-Faced Doors:

a. Core: Structural composite lumber . b. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied.

1.5 Fire-Rated Doors:

a. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated.

b. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

1) 125-mm top-rail blocking. 2) 125-mm bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. 3) 125-mm midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates. 4) 125-mm midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.


c. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile matching face veneer, and laminated backing at hinge stiles for improved screw-holding capability and split resistance.

d. Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles matching face veneer that are labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals.


1.1 Use: Only where specifically scheduled or otherwise indicated for use on a case-by-basis.

HOLLOW-CORE DOORS

a. Use only at opaque finish.

1.2 Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:

a. Core: Standard hollow core. b. Construction: Five plies. c. Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows:

1) 125-by-460-mm lock blocks at both stiles.

1.3 Interior Plastic-Laminate-Faced Doors:

a. Core: Standard hollow core. b. Construction: Plastic-laminate faces glued directly to core. c. Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows:

1) 125-by-460-mm lock blocks at both stiles.


1.1 Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for project-site fitting.

FABRICATION

1.2 Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

1.3 Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

a. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

b. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.



1.1 Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

SHOP PRIMING

1.2 Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop seal faces and edge of doors, including cutouts, with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."


1.1 General: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" for factory finishing.

FACTORY FINISHING

1.2 Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.

1.3 Transparent Finish:

a. Grade: Premium . b. Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.

1.4 Opaque Finish:

a. Grade: Custom. b. Finish: AWI System OP-2 catalyzed lacquer. c. Sheen: As selected.

SCHEDULE 2 -


EXECUTION

1.1 Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

EXAMINATION

a. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

b. Reject doors with defects.

1.2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


1.1 Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

INSTALLATION

1.2 Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.


a. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

1.3 Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

a. Clearances: Provide 3.2 mm at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 3.2 mm from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 6.4 mm from bottom of door to top of threshold.

1) Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

b. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 3-1/2 degrees at lock and hinge edges.

1.4 Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

1.5 Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

1.6 Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements:

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Doors that do not swing or operate freely.

1.1 Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



PART 2 -

PART 1 -

SECTION 08714 - DOOR HARDWARE


GENERAL


SUMMARY

a. Commercial door hardware for the following:

1) Swinging Doors 2) Security Gates 3) Electrified Hardware

1.2 Related Sections:

a. Division 8 Section for metal doors and frames. b. Division 8 Section for wood doors. c. Division 8 Section for FE/BR door assemblies. d. Division 16 for electronic security and power for electrically operated hardware

devices. e. Classified Volume, Paragraph 3.7 for Hardware Sets in classified areas.


1.1 General: Submit Security hardware and non- security hardware sets separately in accordance with Division 1 requirements.

SUBMITTALS

1.2 Product Data: Submit three copies of catalog cuts of all items used in the supplier's schedule.

1.3 Hardware Schedules: Based on hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into groups or sets showing complete designations of every item required for each door opening. Schedule shall be vertical layout similar to the format used herein. Lines shall be double-spaced with pages numbered and dated. Security Hardware Sets shall be listed as SHW-1, SHW-2, etc; non-security Hardware Sets shall be listed as HW-101, HW-102, etc.

a. For doors of different sizes or where hinges, locks or closers are different, a separate heading shall be used. No labeled openings shall be combined with non-labeled openings. Horizontal hardware schedules are not acceptable. Include the following:

1) Number, location, hand, fire rating, Government Code, size and material of each door opening (hands and swings to be determined in relation to key side of opening).


2) Type, style, function, size, finish and quantity of each hardware item. 3) Name and manufacturer of each item. 4) Fastening requirements. 5) Explanation of abbreviations used. 6) Keying information. 7) Wiring diagrams (after each corresponding hardware group).

1.4 Hardware Schedule Index: Furnish an index cross referencing Contract Document door number and hardware group, and supplier's hardware set.

1.5 Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule, indicating the Government's approved master key system, for Government review and approval after Hardware Schedule has been approved.

1.6 Wiring Diagrams: Furnish wiring diagrams illustrating point-to-point hook-up of all electrical hardware specified herein. Include fire alarm and/or access control system interface where applicable. Diagrams shall be complete by opening and shall indicate connections between all components affected. Manufacturers’ standard line diagrams are not acceptable.

1.7 Samples: If requested by the COR, submit one sample of each requested item tagged with full description for coordination with the hardware schedule. These items will remain on file in the COR's office until all other similar items have been installed in the project. At that time, items on file will be released for installation in pre-determined Project locations.

1.8 Operating Instructions: Furnish the Government with one complete set of installation instructions, including special adjusting tools and maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. One complete catalog shall be furnished for each manufacturer listed in the approved hardware schedule.

1.9 Templates: Furnish templates and approved hardware schedule to door and frame fabricators. Where fabricator cannot work to paper templates, ship templates and or physical hardware to factories of respective manufacturers. Prepay cost for shipping and delivery.

1.10 Informational Submittals: Submit the following:

a. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article. b. Qualifications Data: Hardware Suppliers Qualification data.

1.11 Closeout Submittals: Submit specified warranty in accordance with Division 1 requirements.

1.12 Certification: After completion of hardware installation, submit written certification attesting that hardware has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's templates and instructions and that hardware has not been altered.



1.1 General Requirements: Hardware has been specified by manufacturer's name, brand and catalog numbers for purpose of establishing basis for quality, design and operational function.

a. Except where specifically indicated otherwise (i.e., LCN, Von Duprin - no substitution), equivalent products from other listed manufacturers are also acceptable.

b. Provide designated product, or where more than one product or manufacturer is listed, provide equivalent product of one of other listed manufacturers.

c. Obtain each type of hardware from single manufacturer. d. Hardware Sets within this Section are not complete with respect to thickness of

doors, hand, backset, method of fastening, and other detail requirements. e. Review Drawings and Door Schedules thoroughly and provide required hardware

for all openings, including openings that may have been inadvertently omitted from Door Schedules.

f. Should opening be omitted or opening not indicated with hardware set, provide hardware of same quality, design and function as specified for similar openings.

g. Furnish hardware complete with brackets, plates, fittings, fastenings and other accessories required for installation.

1.2 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with UFAS to accommodate barrier free design except where specifically indicated by the Government.

a. Provide knurled tactile warning on door hardware to hazardous areas; abrasive coating not acceptable.

b. Comply with NFPA 80 for hardware at fire-rated assemblies. c. Provide hardware that has been tested and listed by UL or FM for fire-rated

assemblies of types that comply with requirements of door and frame labels.

1.3 Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware for a period of not less than two years, and who is, or who employs an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who will be available at reasonable times during the course of Work for consultation about Project's hardware requirements.


1.1 Pack each hardware item separately. Include manufacturer's printed installation instructions, trim, fasteners accessories, and special tools necessary for installation.


1.2 Legibly mark and adequately label each package indicating opening for which intended. Provide markings corresponding with approved Hardware Schedule.

1.3 Deliver permanent security cores and keys as indicated in Keying section, not less than two months prior to scheduled substantial completion.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - WARRANTY


1.1 Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with Division 1 requirements.

a. Manufacturer's warranty stating closer will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum of 10 years from date of manufacturer.

SCHEDULE 1 -


PRODUCTS

1.1 Acceptable Manufacturers:

HINGES

a. Bommer Industries. b. Hager Companies. c. McKinney. d. Stanley Hardware (Manufacturer named in Hardware Sets in this Section).

1.2 Butt Hinges: Five knuckle design with square corners.

a. Full mortise type. (Heavyweight, Stainless Steel - ANSI A5111). b. Flat button tip and matching plug. c. Non-removable pins for out-swing exterior doors and for interior reverse bevel

doors equipped with locking; safety stud is not acceptable. Non-rising pin for other doors.

d. Non-ferrous construction at all locations (interior and exterior). e. Anti-friction bearings may be furnished in lieu of ball bearings, except where

prohibited on fire doors by the requirements of NFPA 80.

1.3 Minimum Number Hinges:

a. Furnish two hinges for doors 1520 mm (60-inches) or less in height and one additional hinge for each additional 760 mm (30 inches) of height or fraction thereof.

1.4 Minimum Size:

a. Unless otherwise specified, hinges for doors through 914 mm (36-inches) wide shall be 115 by 115 mm (4.5 by 4.5); hinges for doors over 914 mm (36-inches) wide shall be 127 by 115 mm (5 by 4.5).

1.5 FE/BR Hinges: For FE/BR doors that utilize a continuous Roton hinge, provide Roton 1200 Series of equivalent extra-heavy duty hinge.



LOCKS, LATCHES, AND DEADLOCKS


a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware. (Manufacturer named in Hardware Sets in this Section.

b. Schlage Lock Company.

1.2 Description: Mortise locks and latches shall be equal to Corbin Russwin ML2200 Series with NSM trim.

a. Levers shall be cast or solid metal. b. All internal working parts of the lock shall be brass bronze, steel or stainless steel. c. For each lock and latchset, provide strike box and square corner ASA strike with

curved lips of sufficient length to protect frames.

1.3 Where indicated in the hardware sets, furnish Medeco Series padlocks or Corbin Russwin Series IC-PL 5000 as required.


1.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: No substitutions.

PUSHBUTTON LOCKS

a. Simplex Access Controls.

1.2 Trim: Furnish units complete with lever handle trim and ASA strikes.

a. Finish matching lock.

1.3 Strike: ASA 123.875 mm (4 7/8-inches)

a. Equip with wrought box. b. Finish matching lock.


1.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: No substitutions. Provide as indicated in the Hardware Sets.

COMBINATION LOCKS

a. Sargent & Greenleaf. b. Mas Hamilton.

1.2 Requirements: Conform to GSA Specification FF-L2740 for Mas Hamilton.


1.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: No Substitutions. Provide as identified in the Hardware Sets.

SECURITY DEADBOLTS

a. Sargent & Greenleaf. b. Medeco.

1.2 Requirements: Refer to the Hardware Sets for grade and style.



1.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: No Substitutions:

EXIT DEVICES AND EXIT DEVICE ACCESSORIES

a. Von Duprin, Inc.

1.2 Refer to the Hardware Sets for trim, grade, and function.


1.1 Provide cylinders for locks, deadlocks, and other control and locking devices indicated in the Hardware Sets.

CYLINDERS AND CORES

1.2 Non-Security Doors:

a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware (Manufacturer named in Hardware Sets in this Section).

2) Schlage Lock Company.

b. Description:

1) Cylinders shall be minimum six-pin with interchangeable cores. 2) All cylinders shall be equipped with temporary construction core for use

during construction.

1.3 Security Doors:

a. Manufacturers: No substitutions.

1) Medeco.

b. Description:

1) Original high security cylinder with interchangeable core. Provide six-pin commercial keyway.

2) All cylinders shall be equipped with temporary construction core for use during construction.

1.4 Permanent Cores: Contractor shall use only the OBO project numbers for transmitting permanent locks to the Lock Shop in Alexandria, Virginia. Do not identify by project name or location. Refer to "KEYING" Article in this Section.


1.1 Manufacturers: Provide system by this manufacturer or manufacturer approved by the COR.

KEY CONTROL SYSTEM


a. Mosler, Inc.

1.2 Description: Furnish a wall key cabinet, equal to Mosler KC-1612, with dual control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, three-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers and metal cabinet.

a. Equip with pin tumbler locking mechanism. b. Sized to contain index for Project, plus 10 percent expansion.


1.1 Manufacturers: No substitutions.

CLOSERS

a. LCN Closers.

1.2 Description: Non-sized, surface or concealed mounted as indicated.

a. Where parallel arm closers are required, furnish manufacturer's extra-heavy duty arm (No. 3077 EDA).

b. Provide manufacturer’s special rust inhibiting finish on closers exposed to the elements.

1.3 Required Features: Manufacturer's standard cast iron construction.

a. Rack and pinion construction with compression spring, fully hydraulic. b. Closing speed and latching speed controlled by independent valves. c. Adjustable spring power allowing adjustment up to 50 percent in field to suit

individual door conditions. d. Adjustable hydraulic backcheck. e. Hold open and dead stop features where indicated in Hardware Sets.

1.4 Accessories: At surface closers provide manufacturer's standard non-metallic cover.

a. Furnish with necessary arms, track, brackets, plates, shoe, and other accessories to suit door and frame conditions.

1.5 Mounting: At surface closers locate on the least conspicuous side of the door (side opposite public view).


1.1 Manufacturer: No substitutions.

POWER-ASSIST OPERATORS

a. LCN Closers.

1.2 Description: Units shall be pneumatically powered; surface mounted to frame head, and shall operate as manual door closers unless power-assist is activated and when power is lost.


a. Activation of power-assist shall open doors to 90-degrees. b. Furnish actuators with satin stainless steel dress plates embossed with the universal

handicap symbol. Refer to OBO–ICS Chapter 11 for the power assist operators requirements.

1.3 Required Features: Manufacturer's standard cast iron construction.

a. Rack and pinion construction with compression spring, fully hydraulic. b. Closing speed and latching speed controlled by independently operated valves. c. Adjustable spring power allowing adjustment up to 50 percent in field to suit

individual door conditions. d. Adjustable hydraulic backcheck.



AUXILIARY HARDWARE

a. Hager Companies. b. Ives. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Inc. (Manufacturer named in Hardware Sets in this

Section.) d. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc.

1.2 Manual Flush Bolts: Top manual flush bolt shall not exceed 1880 mm (74-inches) from floor to centerline.

1.3 Door Stops: Furnish wall stops equal to Rockwood 400 wherever trim strikes wall. Where wall stops are not suitable, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn-Johnson 450 Series. Where door closers are specified in the Hardware Sets and wall stops are not suitable, provide closer arms with built-in stops (LCN No.3077-CNS).

1.4 Silencers: Furnish rubber silencers equal to Rockwood 608 for hollow metal frames; three per single door and four per pair. Silencers are not required at doors specified to receive continuous weather-stripping or seals.



ARCHITECTURAL DOOR TRIM

a. Builder's Brass Works Corp. b. Hager Companies (Manufacturer named in Hardware Sets in this Section.) c. Rockwood Manufacturing Co. d. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.

1.2 Protection Plates: Kick and armor plates shall be beveled on all sides, equal to Hager Companies 194S Series.


a. Size: Unless otherwise indicated or where narrow bottom rails dictate a smaller size, kick plates shall be 250 mm (10-inches) high and armor plates shall be 865 mm (34-inches) high by 400 mm (16-inches) high on fire rated doors. Width shall be 40 mm (1.5-inches) less than the door width on single doors and 25 mm (1-inch) less than the door width on double doors.

b. Factory-prepare flat goods for conflicting hardware (e.g. lever handles, cylinders, turn pieces, etc.) as required.

1.3 Push and pull plates shall be 150 mm by 400 mm (6 by 16).

1.4 Fasteners: Flat goods shall be furnished with Phillips undercut, countersunk screws per ANSI A156.6. Trusshead screws are not acceptable.



OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

a. Architectural Builders Hardware. b. *Glynn-Johnson. (Manufacturer named in Hardware Sets in this Section.) c. Rixson.

1.2 Where wall stops will not work, furnish surface overhead stops equal to Glynn-Johnson 450 Series. In Hardware Sets where door closers are specified, provide closer arms with built-in stops (LCN No.3077-CNS).



THERESHOLDS, WEATHER-STRIPPING AND SEALS

a. Hager Companies. b. National Guard Products. c. Pemko (Manufacturer named in Hardware Sets in this Section). d. Reese Enterprises. e. Zero International.

1.2 Description: Refer to the Hardware Sets for grade and style. Where required, field modify thresholds to accept strikes for flush bolts and exit device rods.

1.3 Smoke Seals: Where required by applicable code, at doors located in Smoke Barrier Partitions, provide smoke seals equal to Pemko S88 at the head and jambs; and at pairs of doors, one Pemko 375CR or two Pemko 303AS astragal seals as appropriate; coordinate with Drawings and schedules.

1.4 Astragals: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide overlapping astragals equal to Pemko 357SP. Astragals shall be full height, installed on the "threat" side of the opening.



1.1 Provide full door gasketing/acoustical seals with flat threshold installed to maintain STC rating of surrounding walls.

ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT

1.2 Certification: Provide certification that the door construction utilized has been tested at an independent laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90-90, and that the STC determined in accordance with ASTM E413-87 is not less than that specified. The laboratory referenced in the certification must be qualified under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NAVLAP) of the U.S. Bureau of Standards. Certification must reference laboratory name, test report number, and date of test; substitution of test data not in accordance with ASTM E90-90 and E413-87 will not be acceptable.

1.3 Secondary Requirements: If fire resistance is required, certify that assemblies have been tested in accordance with ASTM E512-81A (UL 10B) for labeled fire doors and frames and meets the requirements of NFPA 80. If seismic stability is required, submit calculations showing ability of door systems to withstand pertinent seismic forces.



ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware. b. LCN Closers.(Manufacturer named in Hardware Sets in this Section.) c. Rixson.

1.2 Description: Refer to the Hardware Sets for size and style. Install wall holders with shims as required for a complete installation; coordinate with Drawings and details.


1.1 Manufacturers: No Substitutions. Provide as indicated in Hardware Sets.

ELECTRIC STRIKES

a. Folger Adam Co. b. Trine.

1.2 Description: Refer to the Hardware Sets for grade and style.

a. Coordinate electrical connection and installation with Division 16.


1.1 Manufacturer: No substitutions.

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC LOCKS

a. DynaLock.


1.2 Description: Units shall be surface-mounted and shall operate at 24V current. Provide filler plates and mounting brackets as required for complete installation.

a. Coordinate electrical connection and installation with Division 16.


1.1 Manufacturer: No substitutions. Provide as indicated in Hardware Sets.

MONITOR SWITCHES

a. Sentrol. b. Wells Fargo.

1.2 Description: Refer to the Hardware Sets for grade and style. At swinging doors, locate switches in frame head 150 mm (6-inches) from lock edge.


1.1 The following products shall be provided as indicated in the Hardware Sets. No Substitutions.

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

a. Armored Cables: Alarm Lock Corp. b. Cipher Locks: Continental Instruments. c. Combination Lock Lockboxes: Knox Company. d. Combination Lock Weather Housing: Federal Security Systems. e. Crypto Locks: Moniteq Research Labs. f. Disconnect Switches: Ellenco. g. Electric Current Transfers: Alarm Lock Corp. h. Electric Knob Locks: Alarm Lock Corp. i. Electric Power Transfers: Von Duprin, Inc. j. Electromechanical Locks: Sargent & Greenleaf. k. Fire Door Control Packages: AES (alternate Model No. CC-8946 by Moniteq

Research Labs is acceptable). l. High Security Deadbolt Locks: ASSA, Inc. m. Scramble Pads: Hirsch Electronics. n. Wall Actuators: Locknetics.


1.1 Development of keying schedule may require a facility clerance to access the complete room schedule where classified access control are involved. In this cases the subcontractor must handle this material in accordance with the Industrial Security Act.

KEYING

1.2 The procurement and marking of all keying schedule should be referenced/marked using only the OBO project number.

1.3 The following is the Government recommended keying plan for NON-SECURE DOOR OPENINGS:


a. No keying should be done to a master key or grand master key system. To explain this requirement no one MASTER KEY should operate a complete building or no one GRAND MASTER KEY should operate a group of buildings at a post or site.

b. Buildings should be Master Keyed by the floor. c. The Non-Secure hardware sets shall not have Medeco cylinders. d. Each of the following individual areas can utilize KEYED-ALIKE SETS and be

passed by the floor master:

1) Mechanical Rooms. 2) Electrical Rooms. 3) Janitor Closets. 4) Toilet Rooms. 5) Telephone Rooms. 6) Stair Wells. 7) Kitchen Areas.

e. EXAMPLE: All of the Mechanical Rooms from the basement to the penthouse should be keyed alike to a set, and be passed by the individual floor Master Key.

f. This system allows the roving marine who is carrying each of the Floor Master Keys access to any of these rooms on each floor.

g. The authorized personnel for any of the individual keyed alike-set area carrying their keyed-alike set key can open their area on any floor and not open any other area. No other area keyed-alike set key will open any other area.

h. Tenant Areas should utilize keyed different sets and be passed by the floor master. i. Special storage areas and cashiers offices should be single keyed different (SKD)

with no master key. This protects the integrity of the persons who have the responsibility of these type areas.

j. Single office space shall be keyed different and passed by the floor master key. If there is more than one entrance door into an office these doors should be keyed alike, and passed by the floor master key.

1.4 The following is the Government recommended keying plan for SECURE DOOR OPENINGS:

a. Key locksets and cylinders to factory established and recorded system.

1) All key operated locks on individual doors shall be keyed alike. 2) Grand Master and Great Grand Master systems are not permitted. 3) All exterior FE and FE/BR doors shall have an interior cylinder with a non-

removable thumb turn. 4) Security doors shall be keyed different and master keyed by building within

the following categories: Exterior FE and FE/BR doors; interior hard-line doors; Telecommunications Room doors; and EC Room doors.

5) Security doors shall be keyed different and master keyed by floor within the Controlled Access Area, except for the PCC and Secure Conference or Processing rooms.

6) Security doors shall be keyed alike with no master key within the following categories: Pharmacy and Safe Haven or safe area.


7) Security doors shall be keyed different with no master key within the following categories: Telephone Equipment Rooms; Secure Generator Room; React Room; PCC; and Secure Conference or Processing rooms.

1.5 The COR, the General Contractor and either the RSO or the PSO shall meet to determine if there are any special keying conditions required so they may be incorporated into the keying schedule.

1.6 Key Quantities : Furnish plain bow keys of nickel silver material in the following quantities:

a. For each master key system, provide:

1) Two master keys. 2) Two control keys (pinned to the master). 3) Two operating keys per cylinder change.

b. For each individually keyed cylinder, provide:

1) Two control keys. 2) Two operating keys per keyed cylinder.

c. For each construction key system, provide:

1) Two control keys. 2) Eight master keys.

1.7 Identification and Control

a. Identify master keys with registry number; do not stamp with master key, letter M, or similar identification; manufacturer's trademark or identification not allowed.

b. Stamp master keys with DO NOT DUPLICATE. c. Furnish visual controls system; coordinate provisions with the Government.

Stamp or emboss keys and cylinders with identification code.

1.8 Delivery.

a. Deliver construction cores, construction master keys, and construction keys to the Project Site.

b. Permanent cores, operating keys and permanent control keys shall be individually packaged by the door, identified by the lock and OBO project number, and shipped by the supplier, via prepaid freight to: Department of State, SA-24, Attention: Jim Doyle, 5800 Barclay Drive, Suite 3, Alexandria, VA 22315-5700.

c. After removal of temporary construction cores, ship construction cores, construction keys, and construction control keys to the above-mentioned address.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 21 - FINISHES


1.1 Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturers' standard metal alloy of composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser quality than specified or inferred by use of a particular manufacturer's number, style or grade or as established by appropriate referenced specification listed herein.

1.2 Finishes: Finishes shall conform to the quality of finish including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturers' standards, but in no case less than the standards established by ANSI/BHMA A156.18 and Federal Specification FF-H-111C as applicable.

a. All exposed hardware except door closers shall be satin stainless steel, ANSI/BHMA 630/US32D. Closers shall be painted to match satin stainless steel. Hinges shall be satin stainless steel. Items not available in stainless steel shall be furnished with satin chrome finish, ANSI/BHMA 626/US26D.

b. Security hardware finish shall match finish of non-security hardware to the maximum extent possible.

1.3 Prime Coated Items: Field painted under Division 9 painting sections.


1.1 Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepare for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping or sheet metal screws except as specifically indicated.

FASTENERS

a. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat head or oval head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of such work as closely as possible, except as otherwise indicated.

b. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard manufactured units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners.

c. Do not use through bolts for installation except where it is not possible to adequately reinforce the work, to accept machine screws or concealed fasteners or other standard type, to satisfactory avoid the use of through bolts. Grommet nuts and cealnuts are not acceptable.

1.2 Furnish fasteners that are compatible with both the units fastened and the substrates, and which will not cause corrosion or deterioration of hardware, base material reinforcement, or fastener. Furnish wall stops with expansion anchors and machine screws. Furnish thresholds with lead anchors and 1/4-20 stainless steel machine screws.



1.1 Door Coat and Hat Hook: Provide cast aluminum, double prong hooks on inside face of all private office doors and toilet rooms; Ives Model No. 405 wide body design (ANSI/BHMA A156.16, L33113).

SCHEDULE 2 -


EXECUTION

1.1 Examine conditions and proceed with work in accordance with Division 1 requirements.

EXAMINATION


1.1 Install hardware plumb, level, and true to line in accordance with manufacturer's templates, Section 01600, and Project conditions.

INSTALLATION

a. Install fire rated hardware in accordance with NFPA 80. b. Where cutting and fitting is required on substrates to be field painted or similarly

finished, install, fit, remove and store hardware prior to finishing. Reinstall hardware after finishing operations are completed.

c. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.

d. Reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for installation and operation. e. For substrates which are not factory prepared for hardware: f. Mortise work to correct size and location without gouging, splintering or causing

irregularities in exposed finish work. g. Fit faces of mortised components snug and flush without excessive clearance. h. Set thresholds at exterior doors in bed of sealant. Remove excess sealant.

1.2 Hardware Mounting Heights: Mount hardware units at heights recommended by DHI (see "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware") on custom doors except as otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise indicated.

1.3 Cylinder Cores: When instructed, Contractor shall remove temporary construction cores. Permanent cores will be installed by the Government. After installation of the permanent cores, ship construction cores, operating keys, and control keys via pre-paid freight to the DS/PEL/SEM address noted in Paragraph on "Keying."

1.4 Power-Assist Operators: Where post mounted actuator buttons are indicated, run signal wire below grade in conduit complying with Division 16. Elsewhere, run signal wire concealed in Technical Security System conduit. Run pneumatic lines between pumps and door operators concealed. At curtain walls, run pneumatic lines concealed in metal trays finished to match curtain wall.



1.1 Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure correct operation and function.

ADJUSTING

a. Adjust hardware to meet UFAS requirements for operating time and maximum opening force.

b. Ensure weather-stripping and seals do not inhibit closing and positive latching of door.

c. Lubricate moving or operating components as recommended by hardware manufacturer. Use graphite type lubrication if none other is recommended.

d. Replace defective materials or units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Reinstall items found improperly installed.

e. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, readjust and reapply lubricant to hardware items as necessary.


1.1 Instruct Government's designated personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware at time of Substantial Completion.

DEMONSTRATION

a. In the presence of the Government's representative, demonstrate that the keys operate freely in designated unit.

b. Hardware supplier: Completely set-up key control system with keys tagged and placed in cabinet, cross index system executed with appropriate information typed in on index cards and instruct Government's designated personnel in the proper use of the system.


HW-101

HARDWARE SETS – NON-SECURE DOORS

Hinges FBB199 630 1 Latch ML2010 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-102 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2055-CT6 NSM 630 1 Set Flush Bolt 1842/1942 626 1 Dust Strike 570 626 1 Coordinator 1600 600 2 Closers 4041 689 2 Kick Plates 194S 630 2 Stops A/R 626 1 Astragal 357SP 600


HW-103 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2055-CT6 NSM 630 2 Flush Bolt 555 626 1 Dust Strike 570 626 1 Closer 4041-CUSH 689 2 Kick Plates 194S 630 1 Astragal 357SP 600

HW-104 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2055-CT6 NSM 630 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-105 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2055-CT6 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041-CUSH 689

HW-106 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Latch ML2010 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-107 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2055-CT6 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041-CUSH 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630

HW-108 1 Set Bi-Fold Hardware Stanley 2916 2 Dummy Trim ML2050 630

HW-109 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Latch ML2010 NSM 630 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-110 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Latch ML2010 NSM 630 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-111 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2055-CT6 NSM 630


1 Stop A/R 626

HW-112 Hinges FBB199 630 2 Exit Devices 9827L-F-LBR 626 2 Cylinders 3080-CT6 626 2 Closers 4041-EDA 689 2 Kick Plates 194S 630 1 Set Gasket 332CR Head & Jambs 2 Astragals 18041CP 2 Magnetic Holders SEM 7850 689

HW-113 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2055-CT6 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-114 Hinges FBB199 630 2 Exit Devices 9847L-F-LBR 626 2 Closers 4041-EDA 689 2 Kick Plates 194S 630 2 Stops A/R 626



HW-117 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2055-CT6 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041-EDA 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-118 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2057-CT6 NSM 630 2 Flush Bolts 555 626 1 Dust Strike 570 626 2 Armor Plates 194S 630


2 Stops A/R 626 1 Astragal 357 SP 600

HW-119 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2057-CT6 NSM 630 1 Set Flush Bolts 1842 / 1942 626 1 Dust Strike 570 626 1 Coordinator 1600 600 2 Brackets MB 600 2 Closers 4041 EDA 689 2 Kick Plates 194S 630 2 Stops A/R 626 1 Astragal 357 SP 600

HW-120 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Exit Device 9875L-F OBS 626 1 Exit Device 9847EO-F 630 1 Cylinder 1080-CT6 626 2 Closers 4041 689 2 Kick Plates 194S 630 2 Stops A/R 626

HW-121 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Exit Device 98L-F 626 1 Cylinder 3080-CT6 630 1 Closer 4041 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-122 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2055-CT6 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041-EDA 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Set Gasketing S88D Head & Jambs 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-123 Hinges FBB199 630 2 Dummy Trim ML2050 630 2 Roller Latches 592 Mount at Head 626 2 Stops A/R 626

HW-124 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Latch ML2010 NSM 630


1 Closer 4041 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Set Gasketing S88D Head & Jambs 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-125 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2057-CT6 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041 689 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-126 1 Pocket Door Frame Stanley PDFC150N-00-72 1 Privacy Latch 1069L 626

HW-127 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2057-CT6 NSM 630 1 Set Flush Bolts 1842 / 1942 626 1 Dust Strike 570 626 1 Coordinator 1600 600 2 Closers 4041 689 2 Kick Plates 194S 630 2 Stops A/R 626 1 Astragal 357 SP 600

HW-128 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2057-CT6 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-129 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2030-CT6 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Set Gasketing S88D Head & Jambs 1 Threshold (Verify) 1 Stop A/R 626

HW-130 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Exit Device 98L 626


1 Cylinder 3080-CT6 630 1 Closer 4041-H-CUSH 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Set Weather-strip 332CR Head & Jambs 1 Threshold 2005AT

HW-131 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2057-CT6 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041-CUSH 689 1 Set Weather-strip 332CR Head & Jambs 1 Threshold 2005AT

HW-132 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2067-CT6 NSM 630 1 Closer 4041-H-CUSH 689 1 Kick Plate 194S 630 1 Set Weather-strip 332CR Head & Jambs 1 Threshold 2005AT

HW-133 Hinges FBB199 630 2 Sets Push-Pull Bars 154 630 2 Closers 4041-CUSH 689 2 Door Sweeps 315CN 1 Set Weather-strip 332CR Head & Jambs 2 Astragals 18041CP 1 Threshold 2005AT

HW-134 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Set Push-Pull Bars 154 630 1 Closer 4041-CUSH 689 1 Door Sweep 315CN 1 Set Weather-strip 332CR Head & Jambs 1 Threshold 2005AT

HW-135 Hinges FBB199 ETW @ inactive 630 1 Lock ML2057-CT6 NSM 630

1 Hirsh Scramble Pad Model 8 w/2 interior/exterior pads

630 1 Set Flush Bolts 1842 / 1942 626 1 Dust Strike 570 626 1 Coordinator 1600 600


2 Brackets MB 600 2 Closers 4041-CUSH 689 2 Kick Plates 194S 630 1 Electric Strike 6223-FSE 630 1 Astragal 357 SP 600

HW-136 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2057-CT6 NSM 630 2 Flush Bolts 555 626 1 Dust Strike 570 626 2 Stops A/R 626 1 Astragal 357 SP 600

HW-137 Hinges FBB199 630 1 Lock ML2057-CT6 NSM 630 2 Flush Bolts 555 626 1 Dust Strike 570 626 1 Closer 4041-H-CUSH 689 1 Set Weather-strip 332CR Head & Jambs 1 Threshold 2005AT


Set SH-1

HARDWARE SETS – SECURE DOORS

1 Exit device EL98NL x 299 strike Von Duprin 1 Closer 4041-CUSH x SRI LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Power transfer EPT-2 Von Duprin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0400A x CT-Y32 Medeco 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 set Forced entry locks*

Note: * Quantity and model to be same as on certified door, except that FE/BR hinges shall be as specified for hinges in Part 2 of this section.

Note: Provide acoustical treatment.

Set SH-1 MOD1 1 Exit device EL98NL x 299 strike Von Duprin 1 Power-assist closer 4840 equalizer LCN 1 4840-72 MC Cover LCN 1 4840-3077 CNS Cush-N-Stop Arm LCN 1 set Flexible tubing 925 & fittings - as required LCN 1 460 Pneumatic transfer hinge LCN


1 Hinge* 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Power transfer EPT-2 Von Duprin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0400A x CT-Y32 Medeco 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 set Forced entry locks*

Note: * Quantity and model to be same as on certified door, except that FE/BR hinges shall be as specified for hinges in Part 2 of this section. Also furnish door with minimum 940mm clear width to accommodate electromagnetic lock with LCN 4840

Set SH-1 MOD2 1 Exit device EL98NL x 299 strike Von Duprin 1 Power-assist closer 4840 equalizer LCN 1 4840-72 MC Cover LCN 1 4840-3077 CNS Cush-N-Stop Arm LCN 1 460 Pneumatic transfer hinge LCN 1 set Flexible tubing 925 & fittings - as required LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Power transfer EPT-2 Von Duprin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0400A x CT-Y32 Medeco 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 set Forced entry locks*


Set SH-1 MOD3 1 set Forced entry locks*

1 Closer 4041-CUSH x SRI LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Exit device 98EO x 299 strike Von Duprin 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Kick plate 194S Hager


Set SH-1 MOD4 1 set Forced entry locks* 1 Hinge* 1 Exit Device EL98TP x 299 strike Von Duprin 1 Power-assist closer 4840 equalizer LCN 1 4840-72 MC Cover LCN 1 4840-3077 CNS Cush-N-Stop Arm LCN 1 460 Pneumatic transfer hinge LCN


1 Flexible Tubing 925 & Fittings LCN 1 Magnetic door holder SEM 7820 LCN 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Power transfer EPT-2 Von Duprin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0400A x CT-Y32 Medeco 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Kick plate 194S Hager


Set SH-2 1 Hinge* 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folger Adam 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 set Forced entry locks*


Set SH-2 MOD1 1 Hinge* 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Deadbolt 11-7400 Medeco 2 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 set Forced entry locks*


Set SH-2 MOD2 1 Hinge* 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 2 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Deadbolt 11-7400 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24v DynaLock 1 set Forced entry locks*



Set SH-2A 1 set Forced entry locks* 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folger Adam 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Pushbutton lock 2450-41 Simplex 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Exit device 99NL x 990NL-R x 299 strike Von Duprin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0400a x CT-Y32 Medeco


Set SH-2A MOD1 1 set Forced entry locks* 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folger Adam 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Digitrac Model M1N230 220V Combination Switch Hirsch 1 Scramble Pad DS-47L Hirsch 1 Mounting Box MB-8 Hirsch 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Exit device 99NL x 990NL-R Von Duprin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0400a x CT-Y32 Medeco


Set SH-2B 1 Forced entry locks* 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Exit device 98EO x 299 strike Von Duprin 1 Pushbutton lock LP 1020M Simplex 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco


Set SH-2B MOD1 1 set Forced entry locks* 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folger Adam


1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 2 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Pushbutton lock EE 1021MEE Simplex



Set SH-3 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Lockset ML2267 with 402F30 Scalp Plate Corbin Russwin 1 Cylinder and interchangeable core 32-0200 x CT-Z00 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 set Forced entry locks*


Set SH-3 MOD 1 1 Lockset ML2065 Corbin Russwin 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 2 32-0200 x CT - Z00 interchangeable core and cylinder Medeco 1 set Forced entry locks*


Set SH-3 MOD2 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Pushbutton Lock L1021M Simplex 1 Deadbolt 11-7400 Medeco 2 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 set Forced entry locks*


Set SH-4 1 Closer 4041-CUSH x SRI LCN 1 Hinge*


1 Lockset ML2267 with 402F30 Scalp Plate Corbin Russwin 1 Cylinder and interchangeable core 32-0200 x CT-Z00 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 set Forced entry locks*


Set SH-4 MOD1 1 Closer 4041-SRI x CUSH LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Lockset ML2267 with 402F30 Scalp Plate Corbin Russwin 1 Cylinder and interchangeable core 32-0200 x CT-Z00 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 set Forced entry locks* 1 Combination lock with deadbolt extension 8555-102 Sargent & Greenleaf


Set SH-4A 1 Closer 4041-CUSH x SRI LCN 1 Magnetic door holder SEM 7820 LCN 1 Hinge* 1 Lockset ML2267 with 402F30 Scalp Plate Corbin Russwin 1 Cylinder and interchangeable core 32-0200 x CT-Z00 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock


Set SH-5A 1 Hinge* 1 Exit device EL 98TP x 990 TP-R Von Duprin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0400A x CT-Y32 Medeco 1 set Forced entry locks* 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Closer 4041-CUSH x SRI LCN 1 Power transfer EPT-2 Von Duprin 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol


Set SH-5A MOD1 1 set Forced entry locks*


1 Hinge* 1 Monitor switch 1076 Sentrol 1 Power transfer EPT-2 Von Duprin 1 Exit device EL 98TP x 990 TP-R Von Duprin 1 Interchangeable core & cylinder 32-0400A x CT-Y32 Medeco 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 4840 Equalizer LCN 1 4840-72 MC Cover LCN 1 set Flexible tubing 925 & fittings - as required LCN 1 4840-3077 CNS Cush-N-Stop Arm LCN 1 460 Pneumatic transfer hinge LCN


Set SH-5B 1 Hinge* 1 Exit device 98EO x 299 strike Von Duprin 1 set Forced entry locks* 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Closer 4041-CUSH x SRI LCN 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol


Set SH-5B MOD1 1 Hinge* 1 Exit device EL 98EO x 299 strike Von Duprin 1 Power transfer EPT-2 Von Duprin 1 set Forced entry locks* 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock

1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol

1 Power-assist closer 4840 equalizer LCN 1 4840-72 MC Cover LCN 1 4840-3077 CNS Cush-N-Stop Arm LCN 1 set Flexible tubing 925 & fittings - as required LCN 1 460 Pneumatic transfer hinge LCN


Set SH-6 2 Hinges* 1 Exit device 98EO x 299 strike x mullion Von Duprin 1 set Head & foot bolts*


2 Closer-holders 4413-ME x 24V LCN 2 Armor plates 194S Hager 2 Electromagnetic locks 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 2 Monitor switches 1076D Sentrol 2 Stops 466 Rockwood 1 set Forced entry locks* 1 set Weather-stripping 332CR - Head & Jambs Pemko 1 Threshold 2005AS (continuous across opening) Pemko 1 Meeting stile gasket 375CR Pemko 2 Sill sweeps 315CN Pemko 1 Astragal*


Set SH-6 MOD1 2 Hinges* 1 Exit device EL 98NL x 299 strike x mullion Von Duprin 1 Interchangeable core & cylinder 32-0400A x CT-Y32 Medeco 1 Power transfer EPT-2 Von Duprin 1 set Head & foot bolts* 2 Closer-holders 4413-ME x 24V LCN 2 Armor plates 194S Hager 2 Electromagnetic locks 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Power supply PS873-2 Von Duprin 2 Monitor switches 1076D Sentrol 2 Stops 466 Rockwood 2 sets Forced entry locks*


Note: Top vision panel in each leaf

Set SH-7A MOD1 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Digitrac Model M1N230 220V Combination Switch Hirsch 1 Scramble Pad DS-47L Hirsch 1 Mounting Box MB-8 Hirsch 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folder Adam 1 Exit device 9875NL-F x 575 strike Von Duprin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0200 x CT-Z01 Medeco Hinges T4B3786-NRP McKinney 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol

Set SH-8 1 Hinge* 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Exit device RX-98EO x 299 strike Von Duprin


1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Power transfer EPT-2 Von Duprin 1 Fire door control package 944 (includes control module,

AES

1 set Forced entry locks* 1 set Weather-stripping 332CR - Head & Jambs Pemko 1 Threshold* 1 Sill sweep 315CN Pemko


Set SH-8 MOD1 1 Hinge* 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol 1 Fire door control package 944 (includes control module,

AES

1 Exit device RX-EL 98NL x 299 strike Von Duprin 1 Interchangeable core & cylinder 32-0400A x CT-Y32 Medeco 1 Power supply PS873-2 Von Duprin 1 Power transfer EPT-10 Von Duprin


Set SH-9 1 Combination lock CD-X08 with deadbolt extension Mas Hamilton 1 Door viewer U696 Ives 1 Monitor switch SM-3 Wells Fargo 1 Stop 441CU Rockwood

Note: Balance of hardware by Vault door manufacturer. GSA class 5 vault door upgraded to Government Code 2133.

Set SH-10 1 Electro-mechanical lock 8497-100 Sargent & Greenleaf 1 Crypto Lock CC-8521A Moniteq 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0400A x CT-Y32 with

Medeco

1 Armored cable 271 Alarm Lock Corp. 1 Day gate installation kit Door Manufacturer

1 Stop 441CU Rockwood 1 Door Closer and door handle for day gate

Note: Balance of hardware by Vault door manufacturer. Day gate is opaque for acoustic and mechanical reasons.

Set SH-11 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney


1 Combination lock 8555 with deadbolt extension x strike as

Sargent & Greenleaf 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol

1 Stop A/R Rockwood

Set SH-11 MOD1 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 CD-X08 combination lock with deadbolt extension Mas Hamilton 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Closer 4041-CUSH x SRI LCN 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol 1 set Sound seals 599C - Head & Jambs Reese 1 Threshold 151A Pemko 1 Auto door bottom 521C Reese

Set SH-12A Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Deadlock 11-7400 Medeco 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Lockset ML2057 Corbin Russwin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0200 x CT-Z01 Medeco 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folger Adam 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol

Set SH-12A MOD1 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Deadlock 11-7402 Medeco 2 Cylinders & interchangeable cores 32-0201 Medeco 1 Lockset ML2057 Corbin Russwin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0200 x CT-Z01 Medeco 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folger Adam 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol 1 Power-assist closer 4840 equalizer LCN 1 4840-72 cover LCN 1 4820-3077 CNS Cush-N-Stop Arm LCN 1 set Flexible tubing 925 & fittings - as required LCN

Set SH-12B Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Deadlock 11-7400 Medeco 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex


2 Cylinders & interchangeable cores 32-0201 Medeco 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folger Adam 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol

Set SH-12B MOD1 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Deadlock 11-7402 Medeco

1 Pushbutton lock EE1021M/EE1021M Simplex 3 Cylinders & interchangeable cores 32-0201 Medeco

1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folger Adam 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol

Set SH-12C Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Combination lock 8555 with deadbolt extension x strike as

Sargent & Greenleaf

1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folger Adam 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol

Note: Provide acoustical treatment at doors located at waiting areas, growth area, and entry areas to the suites.

Set SH-12C MOD1 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Combination lock 8555 with deadbolt extension x strike as

Sargent & Greenleaf

1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol

Note: Provide acoustical treatment at doors located at TDY office, TDY work stations, meeting rooms, and conference rooms.

Set SH-12C MOD2 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol 1 Combination lock CD-X08 with deadbolt extension Mas Hamilton

Set SH-12C MOD3 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Combination lock CD-X08 with deadbolt extension Mas Hamilton


1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Electric strike 310-2 3/4 x NFS x 24V Folger Adam 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol

Set SH-13 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Lockset ML2067 with 402F30 Scalp Plate Corbin Russwin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0200 x CT-Z00 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol 1 Stop A/R Rockwood

Set SH-13 MOD1 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Lockset ML2022 Corbin Russwin 2 Cylinders & interchangeable core 32-0200 x CT-Z00 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol 1 Stop A/R Rockwood 1 set Weather-stripping 332CR – Head & Jambs* Pemko 1 Threshold 2005AT* Pemko 1 Sill sweep 315CN* Pemko

Note: * At exterior Door No. C-304A.

Set SH-14 1 Latchset ML2010 Corbin-Russwin 1 Combination lock 8555 with deadbolt extension x strike as

Sargent & Greenleaf

Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Stop A/R Rockwood 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol

Set SH-14 MOD1 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 CD-X08 combination lock with deadbolt extension Mas Hamilton 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol 1 Stop A/R Rockwood

Set SH-15 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol 1 Stop A/R Rockwood

Set SH-15 MOD1 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney


1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Sliding deadbolt and strike SM-181 x #14 Sargent & Greenleaf

Set SH-15A Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Deadlock 11-7400 Medeco 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 2 Cylinders & interchangeable cores 32-0201 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol 1 Stop A/R Rockwood

Set SH-15A MOD1 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol 1 Closer 4041-CUSH LCN 1 Electromagnetic lock 2268 x DYNST x 24V DynaLock

Set SH-15A MOD2 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco 1 Deadlock 4013 x less outside cylinder Corbin Russwin 1 Closer 4041-H-CUSH LCN 1 Monitor switch 1076H Sentrol


Set SH-16 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Deadlock 11-7400 Medeco 1 Pushbutton lock L1021M Simplex 2 Cylinders & interchangeable cores 32-0201 Medeco 2 Sliding deadbolts and strikes SM 181 x #13 Sargent Greenleaf 2 Monitor switches 1076D Sentrol 1 Stop A/R Rockwood

Set SH-17 1 Lockset ML2067 with 402F30 Scalp Plate Corbin Russwin 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0200 x CT-Z00 Medeco 1 Monitor switch 1076D Sentrol Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney 1 Stop A/R Rockwood


Set SH – 18- Lock and Leave (L&L) Primary Opaque Door

1 Cypher Lock (access control) SB-24-110

Continental Instruments (or equal,

N #1)

Vari

Certified Forced Entry Lock x Manufacturer (no external keyway)*

Note #2

1 Door Closer 4041 x Cush-n-Stop x Finish

LCN V

Certified Hinge x Manufacturer* Note #2 1 Combination lock with deadbolt extension

(reverse bevel door) 8565-102

Sargent & Greenleaf (or DS-approved

l #2) 1 Magnetic Switch (door monitor) 1076D

Sentrol 1 Electric Power Transfer EPT-1024 x Finish Von Duprin

1 Panic Exit Device (access control) RXEL98DT-F x 980DT trim x 299F strike x Finish

Von Duprin (See Notes #3, #4, #5,

1 Electromagnetic Locking Device 2268DYNST/24V 10 MBS

Locknetics (See Note #6)

1 Combination Lock Weather Cover FSS-961

Federal Security Systems (or DS-

d l) 1 Combination Lock Interior Service Cover FSS-962

Federal Security Systems (or DS-

Note: A) * Quantity and model to be same as on certified door, except that FE/BR hinges shall be as specified for hinges in Part 2 of this section.

B) for compliance with the Uniform Federal Accessibility standards:

Delete: LCN door closer

Add: LCN 4840, LCN 4840-72MC Cover, LCN 4840-3077 , LCN 460 Pneumatic Transfer Hinges and LCN 925 Pneumatic Tubing.

NOTE 1: Power to the EL99 must be provided by an AES726 or 926 power supply. The electronic door control is typically a HIRSCH M8. Other DS approved automated access system locks lock may be substituted. For very small posts, a Moniteq CC-8521 A keypad is acceptable. Provide a battery backup.

NOTE 2: For non-forced entry doors, substitute one Medeco Maxum Deadbolt (model No. 11-7400-6ff-kk) or an equivalent DS-approved one-inch deadbolt lock instead of the manufacturers forced entry locks, and McKinney (or equivalent) none-removable pin hinges (1 and ½ pair) instead of the certified hinge. The S&G combination lock is optional.

NOTE 3: The Von Duprin Electric Power Transfer (21a) and RX sensor switch (Von Duprin part #050226) may be ordered as separate items to field upgrade an existing Von Duprin EL99.

NOTE 4: Existing EL99 panic exit devices equipped with the dogging feature must have the mechanical housing cover plate reversed, to prevent the dogging of the electric latch.

NOTE 5: The RX option is not required on doors having automated access readers on both the interior and exterior side for entry/exit monitoring and anti-passback. This design requires that the electromagnetic lock be incorporated into the fire alarm system to provide emergency deactivation.


NOTE 6: DS-approved alternative hardware with comparable locking force may be substituted for the electric locking hardware. OBO/SM/TSB shall be consulted on all projects that are OBO funded.

Set SH - 18A - Lock and Leave (L&L) Transparent Door

1 Cypher Lock (access control) SB-24-110

Continental Instruments (or equal, see Note # 1) V

Certified Forced Entry Lock x Manufacturer* Note #2 1 Door Closer 4041 x Cush-n-Stop x Finish

LCN V

Certified Hinge x Manufacturer* Note #2 1 Magnetic Switch (door monitor) 1076D

Sentrol 1 Electric Power Transfer EPT-1024 x Finish

Von Duprin (See Note # 3) 1 Panic Exit Device (access control) RXEL98NL x

980NL-R Trim less cylinder x 299F strike x Finish

Von Duprin (See Notes #3, #4, #5, & #6) 1 Electromagnetic Locking Device 2268DYNST/24V-

10 x MBS Locknetics (See Note #6)

1 Recessed Mount Key Control Lockbox (w/Combination Lock) 4440-GCI

Knox (or DS-approved equal)

1 High Security Deadbolt Lock (w/Interior Thumbturn) 6000 x Finish x 2-3/4 x D

ASSA (See Notes #2, #7, & #8)

1 Toggle Switch (Rating 1 Amp @ 24 VDC or greater) Generic

Generic Note:

A) * Quantity and model to be same as on certified door, except that FE/BR hinges shall be as specified for hinges in Part 2 of this section.




NOTE 1: Power to the EL99 must be provided by an AES726 or 926 power supply. The electronic door control is typically a HIRSH M8. A DS approved automated access system may be substituted. For very small posts a Monteq CC-8521 A keypad is acceptable. Provide battery backup.

NOTE 2: For non-forced entry doors, substitute McKinney (or equivalent) non-removable pin hinges (1 and ½ pair for the certified hinge, a Medeco Maxim Deadbolt with removable Medeco core for the ASSA deadbolt, and eliminate the manufacturers forced entry locks. The combination lock key container and Toggle Switch are optional.

NOTE 3: The Von Duprin Electric Power Transfer and RX sensor switch (Von Duprin part #050226) may be ordered as separate items to field upgrade an existing Von Duprin EL99.


NOTE 4: Existing EL99 panic exit devices equipped with the dogging feature must have the mechanical housing cover plate reversed, to prevent the dogging of the electric latch.

NOTE 5: The RX option is not required on doors having automated access readers on both the interior and exterior side for entry/exit monitoring and anti-passback. This design requires that the electromagnetic lock be incorporated into the fire alarm system to provide emergency deactivation.

NOTE 6: DS-approved alternative hardware with comparable locking force may be substituted for the electric locking hardware. A/FBO/PE/CSM shall be consulted on all projects that are A/FBO funded.

NOTE 7: The ASSA deadbolt with key must be procured through DS/PEL/SEM.

NOTE 8: The ASSA deadbolt (49) key is to be securely tethered to the interior of the Key Lockbox (48). The tether should be of chain type material and of a thickness sufficient to withstand daily usage.

Set SH - 18B: Emergency Exit (L&L) Bypass Opaque or Transparent Door

Varie

Certified Forced Entry Lock x Manufacturer w/Exterior Cylinder x ASSA Keyway*

Note #2

1 Door Closer 4041 x Cush-n-Stop x Finish

LCN V

Certified Hinge x Manufacturer Note #2 1 Magnetic Switch (door monitor) 1076D

Sentrol 1 Electromagnetic Locking Device 2268DYNST/24V-

Locknetics 1 Panic Exit Device SS98EO x 299 Strike X Finish

Von Duprin 1 Fire Door Control Package AES-944 (may not be

present on existing doors) AES

1 Recessed Mount Key Control Lockbox (w/Combination Lock) 4440-GCI

Knox (or DS-approved equal)

1 Toggle Switch (Rating 1 Amp @ 24 VDC or greater) Generic

Generic 1 Interchange Core & Rim Cylinder Assembly

32-0400A-6ff-kk X CT-Y32

Medeco

Note:

A) * Quantity and model to be same as on certified door, except that FE/BR hinges shall be as specified for hinges in Part 2 of this section.




Set SH-19 2 sets Forced entry locks with exterior cylinders* 2 Hinges* 1 Latchset ML2010 Corbin-Russwin


1 Combination lock 8555 with deadbolt extension x strike as

Sargent & Greenleaf 1 set Head & foot bolts* 2 Stops A/R Rockwood


Set SH-21 MOD1 Hinges T4B3386-NRP McKinney

2 Monitor switches 1076H Sentrol 1 Latchset ML2010 Corbin-Russwin

1 Deadlock 11-7400 Medeco 1 Cylinder & interchangeable core 32-0201 Medeco

2 Sliding deadbolts and strikes SM 181 x #13 Sargent Greenleaf 2 Stops A/R Rockwood

Set Gate Hardware Exterior padlocks 54-510R00KA Medeco Gate C-106B,C-106C Gates C –301A, C-301B, C-305B & C-305C 2 each at C-304B & C-304


NOB SECURITY DOOR & HARDWARE SCHEDULE

The "Swing" column indicates "xxR"; a reverse bevel swing door is required for all FEBR doors. The swing to be determined by the A&E (RHRB or LHRB). "Dxx" indicates a double door with undetermined swing. The designer shall coordinate the following: adding proper design of required acoustic protection, stops, finishes (for both hardware and doors), thresholds, weatherstripping, seals, sweeps, etc.; updating Government Code to coordinate with required fire protection; updating schedule as design is developed; setting degree of opening for closers; verifying model of LCN pneumatic control box and tubing works with design location of control box to door; updating doors & hardware with design changes; etc. The following security hardware are provided as a general guidance. However the contractor is responsible to design the security hardware according to the RFP package in consultation with OBO/PE/DE/SEB Security Branch .

Note :

Acoustical Treatment: Provide full door gasketing/acoustical seals with flat threshold installed to maintain STC rating of surrounding walls.


NO. LOCATION DOS CODE SWING xxR

SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D

GLAZING MODI-FICATIONS

COMMENTS

CCAC-01 Cer. CAC, Consular Main Entrance

1141 SHW-5A (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

CCAC-02 Cer. CAC, Consular Main Exit 1141 SHW-5B (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

CCAC-03 Cer. CAC, Emp/ Visitor Main Entrance

1141 SHW-5A (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

CCAC-04 Cer. CAC, Emp/ Visitor Main Exit

1141 SHW-5B (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

CCAC-05 Cer. CAC, Corridor to Guard Booth

1123 SHW-3 (Mod 2)

½ light (top)

CCAC-06 Cer. CAC, Corridor to Sally Port

1111 SHW-12B (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

CCAC-07 Cer. CAC, Sally Port to Compound

--- ---

--- --- Swing not shown correctly on plans. Use Remote Latch, weather-rated, operated from within Ceremonial CAC Guard Booth with override controls at MSG Post 1.

CCAC-08 Compound to Cer. CAC Elec Room

2111 SHW-21 (Mod 1)

---

Pair. Exterior.

CCAC-09 Cer. CAC Cons. Exit, CAC to Compound

1111 SHW-12A (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

CCAC-10 Cer. CAC Cons. Entrance, CAC to Compound

1111 SHW-12A (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

CCAC-11 Cer. CAC Visitor Exit, CAC to Compound

1111 SHW-12A (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

CCAC-12 Cer. CAC Visitor Entrance, CAC to Compound

1111 SHW-12A (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

CCAC-13 Cer. CAC, CAC to Visa Passback Booth

1123 SHW-2 (Mod 1)

½ light (top)

SCAC-1 Serv. CAC Entrance, Parking Lot to CAC

1141 RHR SHW-1 (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

SCAC-2 Serv. CAC, Corridor to Guard Booth

1123 RHR SHW-3 (Mod2)

½ light (top)



SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D


COMMENTS

SCAC-3 Serv. CAC, Corridor to Sally Port

1111 RHR SHW-12B (Mod 1)

Full height

Exterior.

SCAC-4 Serv. CAC, Sally Port to Compound

--- RHR ---

--- --- Use Remote Latch, weather-rated, operated from within Service CAC Guard Booth with override controls at MSG Post 1.

SCAC-5 Serv. CAC Corridor to Elec Room

2x11 DRHR SHW-21 (Mod 1)

---

Pair.

SCAC-6 Serv. CAC Screening Area to Compound

1111 RHR SHW-12A (Mod 1)

Full height

SCAC-7 Service CAC, Parking Lot to Loading/X-ray

--- -- ---

--- --- Overhead door. Use two (2) Padlocks -- Medeco 54-510R00KA. Exterior.

SCAC-8 Service CAC, Loading/X-ray to Compound

--- -- ---

--- --- Overhead door. Use two (2) Padlocks -- Medeco 54-510R00KA. Exterior.

SCAC-9 Service CAC, Compound to Loading/X-ray

2111 LHR SHW-13

---

Exterior.



SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D


COMMENTS

SCAC-10 To Protected Generator 2133 DRHR SHW-19

---

Pair. Not shown on plans. Could be located in Service CAC or elsewhere. Could be exterior. If switchgear, automatic transfer switch, and other equipment required to operate protected generator is located out of the generator room, then it also requires SHW-19, DOS Code 2133.

SCAC-11 Service CAC, Outside to Trash Area

--- --- ---

---

Provide two (2) Padlocks -- Medeco 54-510R00KA.

B2-xx Loading Dock to Lobby/Vestibule

1123 DRHR SHW-6 (Mod 1)

½ light (top) Delete Von Duprin 99EO; Add Von Duprin EL99NL x 990NL-R

Exterior.

B2-xx Exterior – Emergency door 2123 SHW-8

---

Exterior.

B2-xx Loading Dock to GSO Shops 1123 DRHR SHW-6 (Mod 1)


Pair. Exterior.



SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D


COMMENTS

B2-xx Lobby/Vestibule to Bldg Corridor

1123 DRHR SHW-6 (Mod 1)


Pair.

B2-xx Corridor to MSG Post 1123 SHW-3

½ light (top)

With deal tray.

B2-xx Corridor to EC Room 2111 or 3111 SHW-17

---

.

B2-xx Corridor to Pouch Vault 2133 SHW-9

---

GSA Class 5 Vault Door. R.O. width = 1194 mm min, 1244 max. R.O. height = 2083 mm min, 2108 mm max.

B2-xx Corridor to Political Liaison Remote Storage

2111 or 3111 SHW-12C (Mod 2)

---

B2-xx Corridor to ESC 2111 or 3111 SHW-12C

---

B2-xx ESC suite to ESC Vault 2133 SHW-9

---

Vault Door. R.O. width = 1194 mm min, 1244 max. R.O. height = 2083 mm min, 2108 mm max.

B2-xx FSN Medical Unit to Pharmacy 2111 or 3111 SHW-11

---

B2-xx Corridor to Mailroom Suite 2111 or 3111 SHW-16

---

B2-xx Mailroom Service Window -- --

--- -- Provide Medeco 54-510R00KA padlock.

B2-xx Reproduction Room to Mailroom

2111 or 3111 SHW-15A

---

B2-xx Regional Courier Suite to Secure Storage

2111 or 3111 SHW-16 (Mod 4)

--- Add 2 kickst

Pair.



SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D


COMMENTS

B2-xx FBIS Suite to FBIS Systems Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-11 (Mod 2)

---

.

B2-xx Corridor to Secure Storage 2111 or 3111 SHW-11

---

.

B2-xx Corridor to DAO Controlled Storage

2111 or 3111 SHW-11 (Mod 1)

---

.

B1-xx Medical Unit to Pharmacy 2111 or 3111 SHW-11

---

1-xx Main Lobby to Interview Room 2123 SHW-1 STC-45 ---

1-xx Interview Room to Interview Room Vestibule

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 STC-45 ---

1-xx Interview Room Vestibule to Corridor

2123 SHW-2B (Mod 1) STC-45 ---

1-xx Main Lobby to IRC 1123 SHW-5

Double light

Pair, split with a mullion to act as 2 single doors.

1-xx IRC to Bldg. Corridor 2111 or 3111 SHW-15A (Mod 3)

---

1-xx Conference Center to Building Corridor

1123 SHW-2A (Mod 1)

½ light (top)

1-xx Consular Work Area to CA Cashier

1111, 2111, or 3111

SHW-15A

---

1-xx Building Corridor to DS Local Investigator Suite

2111 or 3111 SHW-15

---

1-xx Building Corridor to MSG Suite 2111 or 3111 SHW-12C

---

1-xx Terrace to Dining Area 1123 SHW-5 (Mod 1)

Double light Pair, split with a mullion to act as 2 single doors. Exterior.

1-xx Terrace to Dining Area 1123 SHW-5 (Mod 1) Double light

Pair, split with a mullion to act as 2 single doors. Exterior.

Peace Corps Corridor

1111, 2111

SHW 15A

2-xx FAS suite to FAS Systems Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-11 (Mod 2)

---



SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D


COMMENTS

2-xx FCS suite to FCS Systems Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-11 (Mod 2)

---

2-xx AID suite to AID Systems Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-11 (Mod 2)

---

2-xx CDC suite to CDC Systems Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-11 (Mod 2)

---

3-xx Corridor to Exec Suite Entrance 2111 SHW-12C ---

3-xx Corridor to Exec Suite Exit 2111 or 3111 SHW-13 (Mod 1) YES ---

3-xx Corridor to Exec Suite Private Entrance

2111 or 3111 SHW-15A (Mod2) Yes ---

3-xx Corridor to Admin Suite Entrance

2111 or 3111 SHW-12C Yes ---

3-xx Corridor to Pol/ Econ/EST/Ref. Suite Egress

2111 or 3111 SHW-13 (Mod 1) Yes ---

3-xx Corridor to Pol/ Econ/EST/Ref. Suite Entrance

2111 or 3111 SHW-12C Yes ---

3-xx Regional Marine Suite to Reg. Marine Storage

2111 or 3111 SHW-11

---

3-xx FMO Corridor to Cashier Booth 1111, 2111, or 3111

SHW-15A

---


SHW-15A

---


SHW-15A

---

3-xx Corridor to IRM Unclassified Computer Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-11 (Mod 2)

---

Min. 915 mm clear width req'd.

3-xx Corridor to Main Terminal Space

2111 or 3111 SHW-13

---

Assumed next to UCR.

3-xx Corridor to Telephone Equip Room (PBX)

2111 or 3111 SHW-13

---

Assumed next to MTS.



SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D


COMMENTS

3-xx IRM suite to Controlled Storage Room near IMO

2111 or 3111 SHW-14

---

3-xx Corridor to Telecom Closet 2111 or 3111 SHW-14

---

Assumes Telephone Closet houses C-LAN switch. If no C-LAN switch, SHW not required.


---


3-xx Freight Elev Vestibule to CAA Corridor

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 2)

--- Add LCN 4041-SRI x cush-n-stop x degree of

Requires wall-mounted telephone and phone list in elevator vestibule, adjacent to door.

3-xx Passenger Elevator Vestibule to CAA Corridor

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 2)

--- Add LCN 4041-SRI x cush-n-stop x degree of opening, add

Not shown correctly on plans. Requires wall-mounted telephone and phone list in elevator vestibule, adjacent to door.

3-xx Center Corridor to CAA Corridor

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 2)



3-xx Corridor to CAA Conference/Mtg. Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-12C (Mod 3) YES --- Delete Folge





SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D


COMMENTS



3-xx Waiting area/entry and growth area

2111 or 3111 SHW –12C YES

3-xx

TDY office and Meeting room 2111 or 3111

SHW 12 C (Mod1)

YES

4-xx Corridor to Political Liaison Suite Entrance

2111 or 3111 SHW-12C (Mod 1) YES ---

4-xx Corridor to Political Liaison Suite Exit

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 1) YES ---

If this door required to be fire egress for suite, then hardware will require modification. Consult OBO for this situation.

4-xx Corridor to Political Liaison Suite 2nd Exit

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 1) YES ---

If this door required to be fire egress for suite, then hardware will require modification. Consult OBO for this situation.

4-xx Political Liaison Suite to Computer Equipment Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-14 (Mod 1)

---

4-xx Political Liaison Suite to Secure Safe/Pouch Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-11 (Mod 1)

---

4-xx Political Liaison Suite to Workshop

2111 or 3111 SHW-15

---

4-xx Political Liaison Suite to Political Liaison Disintegrator Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-16 (Mod 3) YES ---

Pair.

4-xx Political Liaison Suite to Political Liaison Meeting Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-11 (Mod 1)

---

4-xx Corridor to Regional Support Unit Entrance




SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D


COMMENTS

4-xx Corridor to Type II Conference Room


4-xx Corridor to Radio Repeating Equip. Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-13

---

4-xx Corridor to ESC 2111 or 3111 SHW-12C YES ---

4-xx Corridor to DS Suite Entrance 2111 or 3111 SHW-12C YES ---

4-xx Corridor to DS Suite Rear Entrance

2111 or 3111 SHW-12C (Mod 4) YES --- Delete Medeco Maxum 11-7400, delete Medeco 32-0201; Add Corbin-Russwin

4-xx Corridor to DAO Entrance 2111 or 3111 SHW-12C (Mod 1) YES ---

4-xx DAO Suite to DAO Computer Equipment Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-11 (Mod 2)

---

4-xx DAO Suite to DAO Disintegrator Room

2111 or 3111 SHW-16 (Mod 3) STC-45 ---

4-xx Passenger Elevator Vestibule to CAA Corridor

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 2)



4-xx Passenger Elev. Vestibule to North Suites

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 2)


Requires wall-mounted telephone and phone list on non-secure side, adjacent to door.



SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D


COMMENTS

4-xx Center Corridor to CAA Corridor

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 2)



4-xx Center Corridor to North Suites 2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 2)



4-xx Freight Elev. Vestibule to CAA Corridor

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 2)

--- Add LCN 4041-SRI x cush-n-stop x degree of opening, add

Min. 915 mm clear width. Requires wall-mounted telephone and phone list on non-secure side, adjacent to door.

4-xx Freight Elev. Vestibule to North Suites

2111 or 3111 SHW-15 (Mod 2)




2111 or 3111 SHW-12C (Mod 3) yes --- Delete Folge


2111 or 3111 SHW-12C (Mod 3) Yes --- Delete Folge


2111 or 3111 SHW-12C (Mod 3) Yes --- Delete Folge











SEC. HARD -WARE

DOOR MATL.

ACOU -STICS EQ'D


COMMENTS

4-xx Corridor to CAA TDY suite 2111 or 3111 SHW-12C (Mod 3) YES --- Delete Folger

Not shown on plans.


---



--


R-xx Roof to Penthouse 2111 LHR SHW-13 (Mod 5)

Delete Corbin-Russwin ML2067, delete Scalp Plate 402F

Exterior.

R-xx Cooling Tower Area to Penthouse

2111 LHR SHW-13 (Mod 5)


Exterior?

R-xx Cooling Tower Area to Roof 2111 LHR SHW-13 (Mod 5)


Exterior.




PART 2 -

PART 1 -

SECTION 09652 - SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS


GENERAL

1.1 This Section includes sheet vinyl floor coverings, without backings.

SUMMARY


1.1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

SUBMITTALS

a. Include manufacturers’ product data for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.

1.2 Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 150-by-230-mm 6-by-9-inch) sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.

a. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 230 mm 9 inches) long, of each color required.

1.3 Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each flooring product and welding bead color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 150-by-230-mm 6-by-9-inch) Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.

1.4 Maintenance Data: For floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals.


1.1 Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in heat-welding techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

a. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding techniques required.

1.2 Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


1.1 Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 10 deg C or more than 32 deg C. Store rolls upright.




1.1 Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 21 deg C or more than 29 deg C, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

PROJECT CONDITIONS

a. 48 hours before installation. b. During installation. c. 48 hours after installation.

1.2 After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 13 deg C or more than 35 deg C.

1.3 Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

1.4 Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

1.5 Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

SCHEDULE 1 -


PRODUCTS

1.1 Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 2.0 mm thick.

SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING

1.2 Color and Pattern: As selected by COR.

1.3 Wearing Surface: Smooth.

1.4 Sheet Width: 1.8 m to 2.7 m in width as selected.

1.5 Seaming Method: Heat welded.

1.6 Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

a. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.


1.1 Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.

INSTALLATION MATERIALS

1.2 Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering and substrate conditions indicated.

1.3 Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer.


a. Color: As selected.

1.4 Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:

a. Cove Strip: 25-mm radius provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. b. Cap Strip: vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by floor covering

manufacturer.

1.5 Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

SCHEDULE 2 -


EXECUTION

1.1 Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.

EXAMINATION

a. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings.

b. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


1.1 Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings.

PREPARATION

1.2 Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

a. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

b. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

c. Moisture Testing:

1) Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m in 24 hours.

2) Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

1.3 Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.


1.4 Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

1.5 Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

a. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1.6 Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


1.1 Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

INSTALLATION

1.2 Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings as follows:

a. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. b. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at

least 152 mm away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. c. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. d. Avoid cross seams.

1.3 Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.

1.4 Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

1.5 Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

1.6 Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

1.7 Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

1.8 Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.

1.9 Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 152 mm up vertical surfaces. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.




1.1 Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

a. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. b. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. c. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.

1) Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer.

1.2 Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

a. Apply protective floor polish to surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.

b. Cover floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion.

c. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.



PART 2 -

PART 1 -

SECTION 09912 - PAINTING


GENERAL

1.1 This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces.

SUMMARY

a. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

1.2 Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, COR will select from standard colors and finishes available.

a. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.

1.3 Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

a. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

1) Architectural woodwork. 2) Acoustical wall panels. 3) Metal lockers. 4) Elevator equipment. 5) Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. 6) Light fixtures.

b. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:

1) Foundation spaces. 2) Furred areas. 3) Ceiling plenums. 4) Utility tunnels. 5) Pipe spaces. 6) Duct shafts. 7) Elevator shafts.

c. Finished metal surfaces include the following:

1) Anodized aluminum. 2) Stainless steel.


3) Chromium plate. 4) Copper and copper alloys. 5) Bronze and brass.

d. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

1) Valve and damper operators. 2) Linkages. 3) Sensing devices. 4) Motor and fan shafts.

e. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.


1.1 General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

DEFINITIONS

a. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

b. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

c. Semi-gloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

d. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.


1.1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

SUBMITTALS

a. Include manufacturers' product data for paints, including printed statement of VOC

content and chemical components. b. Include manufacturers' MSDS information for each product. c. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each

material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

d. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.

1.2 Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

1.3 Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

a. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches 200 mm square. b. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.


c. Label each coat of each Sample. d. Label each Sample for location and application area.

1.4 Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

a. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

b. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


1.1 Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.2 Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

1.3 Environmental Regulations: Comply with Government, regulations limiting volatile organic compound (VOC) content in coating materials, related to coating materials and application methods, as current at time of performance of the work.

a. Paints and coatings listed in Schedules do not necessarily comply with environmental regulations in force at the project site. In such cases, subject to acceptance by Government, provide manufacturer's equivalent or replacement product, as verified by compliance with submittal requirements specified above.

1.4 Pre-installation Conference: Before beginning preparation of samples, meet with Government and appropriate consultants, and other concerned entities.

a. Review requirements for shop-priming, compatibility of each coating material with substrates and other coatings, and the suitability of each specified paint system for the substrates and other field conditions indicated.

b. Record discussions of conference, including decisions and agreements or disagreements reached, and furnish a copy for each attendee. If substantial disagreements exist at the conclusion of the conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set a date for reconvening the conference.

1.5 Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.

a. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate.

1) Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 3 sqm. 2) Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.


b. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.

c. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.


1.1 Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

PROJECT CONDITIONS

a. Product name or title of material. b. Product description (generic classification or binder type). c. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. d. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. e. Thinning instructions. f. Application instructions. g. Color name and number. h. VOC content.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.

1.1 Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 7 deg C. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1.2 Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 10 and 32 deg C.

1.3 Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 7 and 35 deg C.

1.4 Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

SCHEDULE 1 -


PRODUCTS

1.1 Provide paint products by one of the following manufacturers:

MANUFACTURERS

a. Benjamin Moore b. PPG Industries c. Sherwin-Williams

1.2 Special Coatings:


a. Carboline Company (Carboline) b. Du Pont Company High Performance Coatings (Du Pont) c. Tnemec Company (Tnemec)


1.1 Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

1.2 Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.


1.1 Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.

PREPARATORY COATS

1.2 Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.

a. Ferrous-Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust-inhibitive metal primer. b. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. c. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on

substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.

1.3 Interior Primer: Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.

a. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive metal primer. b. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. c. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on

substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.


1.1 Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint.

EXTERIOR FINISH COATS

1.2 Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel.

1.3 Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete, and Masonry.

1.4 Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals.


1.5 Exterior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel.


1.1 Interior Flat Acrylic Paint.

INTERIOR FINISH COATS

1.2 Interior Flat Latex-Emulsion Size.

1.3 Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel.

1.4 Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel.

1.5 Interior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Gypsum Board.

1.6 Interior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Wood and Metal Surfaces.


1.1 Open-Grain Wood Filler.

INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES

1.2 Interior Wood Stain: Alkyd based.

1.3 Interior Alkyd- or Polyurethane-Based Clear Satin Varnish.

1.4 Interior Waterborne Clear Satin Varnish: Acrylic-based polyurethane.

1.5 Interior Waterborne Clear Gloss Varnish: Acrylic-based polyurethane.

1.6 Paste Wax: As recommended by manufacturer.

SCHEDULE 2 -


EXECUTION

1.1 Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for inspection and acceptance of surfaces to be painted.

APPLICATION

1.2 Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1.3 Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.


a. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

1.4 Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

a. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. b. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and

release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

c. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

1) Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

2) Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

3) If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. 4) Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other

wet wall construction occurs on back side. 5) Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat

of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

d. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.

1) Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2.

2) Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

3) Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

e. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

1.5 Material Preparation:

a. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.


b. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

1.6 Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

a. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

b. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

c. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

d. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. e. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to

match exterior.

1.7 Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

1.8 Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

a. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. b. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply

additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.

1.9 Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.10 Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

1.11 Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.

1.12 Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

1.13 Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

1.14 Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,


holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

1.15 Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

1.16 Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.


1.1 At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.

CLEANING AND PROTECTING

1.2 Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by COR.

1.3 Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

a. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.


1.1 Wherever more than one coat of paint is called for, paint with completely separate coats with the manufacturer’s minimum drying time between coats.

PAINT SCHEDULES

a. Application of separate coats, with manufacturers dry time between, is imperative

and absolute. Drying time between coats is mandatory and not to be waived or modified.

b. Under no circumstances is the number of coats to be combined into a lesser number with an, “equivalent” thickness to attempt to equal separate coats, applied individually.

c. Applications called, “Equivalent”, with fewer than the specified number of coats, but equal to the total thickness, are not acceptable.

d. To assure performance, keep a record of application of each coat, each location, with dates of application, substrate, type of paint, names of applicators, and ambient conditions. Submit the record to the Government for review and acceptance in authorizing payment for the work.


1.1

EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

SYSTEM NO. 1.


a. High Performance Coating Over Exposed To View Shop Primed or Galvanized Steel Surfaces: 1) Structural components, equipment supports, bollards, etc.

b. Certify compatibility with shop applied primers requirements specified in Part I c. Observe paint manufacturer's limitations on elapsed time between coats. d. Provide two coats over primer (first coat) as follows.

1) Intermediate Coat: High performance epoxy coating formulated for use over exterior primed or galvanized steel, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of 2.0 and 3.0 mils. a) Tnemec 27FC Typoxy

2) Finish Coat: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane enamel applied at spreading rate

recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness range of 2.0 to 3.0 mils. a) Tnemec Series 73 (semi gloss) Enduro Shield III

1.2 SYSTEM NO. 2

a. Premium, Full Gloss. Alkyd Enamel Finish: Apply at the fallowing surfaces: 1) Exposed surfaces (exterior and interior) of exterior shop primed hollow

metal door and frame assemblies. 2) Exposed surfaces (exterior and interior) of shop primed overhead coiling

door curtains and other exposed overhead coiling door components.

b. Touch-up shop applied primer before applying finish coats. Provide two finish coats over a shop applied primer 1) First and Second Finish Coats: Premium quality, full gloss, exterior, alkyd

enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. a) Moore IronClad Quick-Dry Industrial Enamel #071 b) Tnemec Series 23, Enduratone

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

1.1

General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. Apply additional coats when undercoats, previous coatings or other conditions show through the final coat, until the cured film is of uniform coating finish, color and appearance.

SYSTEM NO. 3

a. Semi-Gloss, two component Polyester - Epoxy Coating over Concrete. 1) Apply over concrete wall and column surfaces where sanitary conditions

must be maintained, where subject to water, and as scheduled

b. Provide two coats over a primer as follows: 1) Primer: Acrylic primer spread at rate recommended by manufacturer.

a) Moore: Regal first coat interior latex primer & underbody #216


2) Second Coat: Epoxy enamel base and polyester-resin hardener, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils. a) Moore: Iron Clad Tile Like Catalyzed Coating #371

3) Finish Coat: Semigloss, clear epoxy glaze and polyester resin hardener,

applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils. a) Moore Iron Clad Tile-Like Clear Glaze Semi-Gloss

1.2 SYSTEM NO. 4

a. Semi-Gloss, Acrylic Enamel over Concrete. 1) Apply over concrete wall and column surfaces scheduled to receive paint

other than system 3 and generally at the following locations: a) Stairs, service corridors and service areas on each floor. b) Locker rooms, athletic areas, workrooms.

b. Provide two coats over a primer as follows:

1) Primer: Alkaki-resistant, acrylic latex interior primer spread at rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. a) Moore: Regal first coat interior latex primer & underbody #216 b) PPG: 6-2 Speedhide Interior Quick Drying Latex Sealer

2) First and Second Coats: Semigloss.acrylic-latex interior enamel applied at

spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. a) Moore: Moore’s Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel

#333 b) 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall &Trim LO-Lustre Semi-Gloss

Latex.

1.3 SYSTEM NO. 5

a. Flat Acrylic over Concrete. 1) Apply over concrete wall and column surfaces scheduled to receive paint

not included in Systems No. 3 or 4

b. Provide one finish coat over a primer as follows: 1) Primer: Alkaki-resistant, acrylic latex interior primer spread at rate

recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. a) Moore: Regal first coat interior latex primer & underbody #216 b) PPG: 6-2 Speedhide Interior Quick Drying Latex Sealer

2) Finish Coat: Flat, latex based, interior paint applied at spreading rate

recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.


a) Moore: Moore’s Regal Wall Satin #215 b) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Interior Wall flat latex paint.

1.4 SYSTEM NO. 6

a. Flat Acrylic over Concrete with leveling coat. 1) Apply at concrete ceiling surfaces scheduled to receive leveling coat.

b. Provide vinyl-base leveling coat with primer and one finish coat, as follows:

1) Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex interior primer spread at rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. a) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody

#216 b) PPG: 6-2 Speedhide Interior Quick Drying Latex Sealer.

2) Finish Coat: Flat, acrylic-latex, interior paint spread at rate recommended by

the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. a) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215 b) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Interior Wall Flat Latex Paint

1.5 SYSTEM NO. 7

a. Semi-Gloss, Two Component, Polyester-Epoxy Coating over Concrete Masonry Units. 1) Apply over concrete masonry units subject to water and elsewhere where

scheduled.

b. Provide two finish coats over a block filler as follows: 1) Block Filler: High performance, latex based, block filler applied rate

recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils. a) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #

2) Second Coat: Epoxy enamel base and polyester resin hardener, applied at

spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils. a) Moore: IronClad Tile-Like Catalyzed Coating #371

3) Finish Coat: Semigloss, clear epoxy glaze and polyester resin hardener,

applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils. a) Moore Iron Clad Tile-Like Clear Glaze Semi-Gloss 370-02

1.6 SYSTEM NO. 8

a. Semi-Gloss, Acrylic-Enamel over Concrete Masonry Units. 1) Apply over concrete masonry units, where scheduled, generally at the

following locations:


a) Stairs, service corridors. b) Locker rooms, athletic spaces and toilet areas.

b. Provide two finish coats over a block filler as follows:

1) Block Filler: High performance, latex based, block filler applied rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils. a) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173 b) PPG: 6-7 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Block Filler

2) First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior applied at

spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. a) Moore: Moore’s Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic latex Enamel

#333 b) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-

Lustre Semi-Gloss Latex.

1.7 SYSTEM NO. 9

a. Flat, Acrylic-Enamel over Concrete Masonry Units. 1) Apply over concrete masonry units, where scheduled, but not included in

Systems 7 and 8.

b. Provide two finish coats over a block filler as follows: 1) Block Filler: High performance, latex based, block filler applied rate

recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils. a) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173 b) PPG: 6-7 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Block Filler

2) First and Finish Coats: Flat, latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. a) Moore: Regal Wall satin #215 b) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Interior Wall Flat Latex Paint.

1.8 SYSTEM NO. 10

a. Semi-gloss, Acrylic-Enamel over Gypsum Board. 1) Apply at exposed gypsum board wall surfaces scheduled to receive paint at

the following locations: a) Stairs and service corridors b) Locker rooms, athletic spaces, toilets.

b. Provide two finish coats over a primer as follows:

1) Primer: Latex based interior applied rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. a) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody

#216


b) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Drying Interior Latex Primer Sealer.

2) First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, acrylic-latex- interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. a) Moore: Moore’s Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex enamel

#333 b) PPG: 89-10 Satinhide Interior enamel wall& Trim Lo-Lustre

semi-Gloss Latex.

1.9 SYSTEM NO. 11

a. Low- Lustre, Acrylic-Enamel over Gypsum Board. 1) Apply at exposed gypsum board wall surfaces scheduled to receive low

luster, or satin finish paint.

b. Provide two finish coats over a primer as follows: 1) Primer: Latex based interior applied rate recommended by manufacturer to

achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. a) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody

#216 b) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Drying Interior Latex Primer Sealer.

2) First and Second Coats: Low-Lustre (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex-

interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. a) Moore: Moore’s Regal AquaVelvet #319 b) PPG: 89-Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim

Enamel

1.10 SYSTEM NO. 12

a. Flat, Acrylic-Enamel over Gypsum Board. 1) Apply at exposed gypsum board wall surfaces scheduled to receive paint but

not included in Systems 10 and 11.

b. Provide one finish coat over a primer as follows: 1) Primer: Latex based interior applied rate recommended by manufacturer to

achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. a) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody

#216 b) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Drying Interior Latex Primer Sealer.

2) Finish Coat: Flat, acrylic-latex- interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. a) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex

enamel #333 b) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Interior Wall Flat Latex

1.11 SYSTEM NO. 13


a. Low-Lustre, Acrylic Enamel over Steel Surfaces:

1) Apply to steel doors and frames, metal trim and other miscellaneous metal items except surfaces included in System 14.

b. Provide two finish coats over primer.

1) Primer: Quick drying rust inhibiting alkyd based or epoxy metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at a rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. a) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust inhibitive paint #163 b) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior rust inhibitive steel

primer. 2) First and Second Coats: Low luster (eggshell or satin) acrylic-latex, interior

enamel applied at spread rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. a) Moore: Moore’s Regal AquaVelvet #319 b) PPG: 89-Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim

Enamel

1.12 SYSTEM NO. 14

a. Semi-gloss alkyd enamel over steel surfaces: 1) Apply to steel surfaces scheduled to be painted, at the following locations:

a) Steel doors and frames not included in Systems 12 or 13. b) Steel stair components, ladders, railings, and handrails. c) Metal trim and other miscellaneous items including mechanical and

electrical.

b. Provide one finish coat over an undercoat and an alkyd or latex primer. Except for touch up, primer is not required over shop-primed items. 1) Alkyd Primer: Quick drying, rust inhibitive, alkyd based or epoxy metal

primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at a rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. a) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust inhibitive paint #163 b) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior rust inhibitive steel

primer. c) S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1

2) Latex Primer:Alkyd-modified, acrylic, rust inhibitive latex primer, as

recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at a rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. a) Moore: Retard-X do Rust inhibitive Latex primer #162 b) PPG: 6-208 Red inhibitive metal primer.

3) Undercoat: Alkyd interior enamel undercoat or semi-gloss interior alkyd

enamel finish coat, Alkyd Primer: Quick drying, rust inhibitive, alkyd based


or epoxy metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at a rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. a) Moore: Moore’s alkyd Enamel Underbody #217 b) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick Drying Enamel

Undercoater c) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel

B34W200

4) Finish Coat: Low –odor, semi-gloss, alkyd interior enamel applied at, a spreading rate as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. a) Moore: Alkyd Dulamel #207 b) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and

Trim Semi-Gloss Oil c) S-S: Classic 99 Interior/Exterior Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel A-40

Series.

1.13 SYSTEM NO. 15

a. Waterborne Satin –Varnish Finish: 1) Apply at hardwood surfaces to receive transparent finish, but not scheduled

to receive shop-applied finish by casework fabricator.

b. Provide two finish coats of a waterborne, clear satin varnish over sealer coat and a waterborne, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain, if recommended by the manufacturer for wood species indicated.

1) Stain Coat: Waterborne, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate

recommended by the manufacturer. a) Moore: Benwood Penetrating Stain #234 b) PPG: 77-302 Rez Interior Semi-transparent Stain.

2) Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by

the manufacturer. a) Moore: (None recommended) b) PPG: 77-Rez Interior Quick Drying Sealer and Finish.

3) First and Second Finish Coats: Waterborne, varnish finish applied at

spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. a) Moore: Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane #423, Satin b) PPG: Rez Satin Acrylic Clear Polyurethane

1.14 SYSTEM NO.16

a. Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel over Wood. 1) Apply at exposed wood and construction panel surfaces not scheduled to

receive transparent, natural, finish.


b. Provide two finish coats over a primer. 1) Primer: Alkyd, or acrylic-latex based, interior wood primer, as

recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at a rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. a) Moore: Moore’s Alkyd enamel underbody #217 b) PPG: 17-225 Quick Drying Enamel Undecoat

2) First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin) acrylic latex interior

enamel, applied at a rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. a) Moore: Moore’s Regal Aqua Velvet #319 b) PPG: 89 Line Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Latex Wall and

Trim Enamel

1.15 SYSTEM NO.17

a. Semi-gloss, Alkyd Enamel over other Wood Surfaces. 1) Apply at exposed wood and construction panel surfaces not scheduled to

receive transparent, natural, finish, and not included in System No. 16.

b. Provide two finish coats over a primer. 1) Primer: Alkyd, or -latex based, interior wood undercoater, as recommended

by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at a rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. a) Moore: Moore’s Alkyd enamel underbody #217 b) PPG: 17-225 Quick Drying Enamel Undecoat c) S-W: Pro Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200

2) First and Second Coats: Odorless, semigloss, interior enamel, applied at a

rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils. a) Moore: Alkyd Dulamel #207 b) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and

Trim Semi-Gloss Oil c) S-W: Classic 99 Interior/Exterior Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel

A-40 Series.

1.16 SYSTEM NO. 18

a. Two Component Epoxy Coating System for Concrete Floors 1) Apply at exposed concrete floors in spaces requiring special high

performance coating as scheduled.

b. Provide two finished coats. Prior to applying coating, condition floor according to coating manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. 1) First and Second Coats: High gloss polyamide epoxy coating system applied

at spreading rate as recommended by manufactured to achieve a total dry


film thickness of not les than 2.5 mils per coat. Thin first coat per manufacturer’s recommendations. a) Moore: Iron Clad Chemical and Water Resistant Epoxy Enamel

#182 b) PPG: 97-1 Series Aquapon Polyamide- Epoxy Ready Mixed

Colors c) Tnemec: Series 67 Tneme-Tread.

1.17 SYSTEM NO. 19

a. Concrete Sealer (chemical type). 1) Apply at concrete floor surfaces as follows:

a) Indicated to receive glue down carpet installation. b) Surfaces indicated to be sealed

b. Provide transparent, colorless, penetrating liquid hardener and sealer of proven

compatibility with carpet adhesive. 1) Prepare surfaces and apply not less than two coats complying strictly with

the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. a) “Armotrop”, by Anti-Hydro Co. b) “Sikafuard 70”, by Sika Corp. c) “Thoro Penetrating Sealer”, by Thoro System Products



PART 2 -

PART 1 -

SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS


GENERAL

1.1 This Section includes baked-enamel units as follows:

SUMMARY

a. Toilet Enclosures: Ceiling hung. b. Urinal Screens: Wall hung.


1.1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

SUBMITTALS

1.2 Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

a. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. b. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.


1.1 Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."

QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.2 Comply with ADA and ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities which was published in the Federal Register in July 2004.


1.1 Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

SCHEDULE 1 -


PRODUCTS

1.1 Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

MANUFACTURER

a. Ampco b. Bobrick c. Sanymetal



1.1 Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, stainless steel #4 (Satin) facing sheets are pressure laminated to core material. Units have continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edge closures. Exposed surfaces are free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. Corners are sealed by welding or clips. Exposed welds are ground smooth.

MATERIALS

a. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 25 mm for doors and panels and 32 mm for pilasters.

b. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units.

c. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.

d. Urinal-Screen Construction: Matching panels.

1.2 Pilaster Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not less than 0.8 mm specified thickness and 75 mm high, finished to match hardware.

1.3 Brackets (Fittings):

a. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel for toilet enclosures. b. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: stainless steel for urinal screens.


1.1 Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

ACCESSORIES

a. Material: Stainless steel #4 (Satin).

1.2 Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.


1.1 Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage.

FABRICATION

1.2 Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 610-mm- wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 914-mm- wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 813-mm- wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.


a. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees.

b. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.

c. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Coats hooks in accessible stalls to mounted at 1220.

d. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.

e. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.

SCHEDULE 2 -


EXECUTION

1.1 General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

INSTALLATION

a. Maximum Clearances:

1) Pilasters and Panels: 13 mm. 2) Panels and Walls: 25 mm.

b. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel.

1) Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.

2) Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

1.2 Ceiling-Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when doors are in closed position.

1.3 Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.


Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees

ADJUSTING


from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return to fully closed position.END OF SECTON 10155


PART 2 -

PART 1 -

SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES


GENERAL


SUMMARY

a. Portable fire extinguishers. b. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:

1) Portable fire extinguishers.


1.1 Provide the following submittals:

SUBMITTALS

1. Product data, for each material specified or otherwise required. Include installation instructions.

2. Operating and maintenance instructions. 3. Warranty.


1.1 NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.2 Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.


1.1 Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

COORDINATION

1.2 Apply decals and vinyl lettering on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.


1.1 Operational Readiness: Delivery fully charged with all necessary components to be fully operational with breakaway seals in place.



1.2 Packaging: Each extinguisher shall be individually packaged in sturdy packaging designed to withstand normal shipping and handling without damage.

1.3 Storage: Store extinguishers in environmental conditions as recommended by manufacturer and in clean condition.


1.1 Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

WARRANTY

a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. 2) Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

b. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

SCHEDULE 1 -


PRODUCTS

1.1 Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

MATERIALS

1.2 Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:

a. Sheet: ASTM B 209M. b. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221M.

1.3 Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1.4 Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 2 (tinted, heat absorbing, and light reducing), bronze tint.

1.5 Break Glass: Clear float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick, single strength.


1.1 General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS


a. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

1.2 Type: Industrial grade external cartridge operated multipurpose A-B-C portable dry chemical fire extinguishers in 4.54 kg (10 lb.) and 9.07 kg. (20 lb.) sizes. The extinguishers shall meet or exceed the following U.L. ratings:

Extinguisher Size

4.54 kg (10 lb.) unit 4-A:40-B:C

Extinguisher Rating

9.07 kg. (20 lb.) unit 10-A:60-B:C

1.3 Configuration: External cartridge design equipped with rubber discharge hose and On/Off control nozzle.

1.4 Dimensions: Extinguishers must not exceed the following dimensions:

Extinguisher Height Width

4.54 kg (10 lb.) 41.0 cm (18-1/8 in) 21.0 cm (8-1/4 in) 13.3 cm (5-1/4 in)

Depth

9.07 kg. (20 lb.) 52.1 cm (20-1/2 in) 26.4 cm (10-3/8 in) 17.8 cm (7 in)

1.5 Operation: Extinguisher activation and operation actions limited to:

a. Removal of safety ring pin. b. Puncture of pressure cartridge to pressurize main canister. c. Operation of discharge nozzle.

1.6 Extinguishing Agent: Designed for and rated for use with A-B-C rated multipurpose dry chemical powder.

1.7 Approvals: Extinguishers shall meet or exceed approvals of Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) or Underwriters Laboratories Canada (U.L.C), and the United States Coast Guard.

1.8 Inspection Capability: With the exception of internal inspection of pressure cartridges, extinguishers shall be designed and constructed to allow complete visual inspection of all internal and external components by disassembly without need for special knowledge or tools.

1.9 Maintainability: Extinguishers shall be designed to allow field recharging without the requirement for special tools or servicing equipment.

1.10 Operating Instructions: Complete and concise extinguisher operating instructions shall be clearly displayed in English with visual pictograms illustrating the symbols for Class A, B, and C fire classifications on the front of main canister of the extinguisher. Complete after-use maintenance instructions and agent identifications shall appear on a placard on the rear of the extinguisher in English.


1.11 Inspection Tag: Provide with each unit.

1.12 Construction:

a. Main Canister Shell: Corrosion and impact resistant steel and painted with red paint resistant to cracking, chipping, and corrosion in harsh climates. The shell must have a fill port at top with an opening of not less than 6.985 mm (2-3/4 inch) in diameter internally threaded to accommodate a fill cap. The shell exterior shall incorporate a device to secure the discharge nozzle.

b. Pressure Cartridge: The pressure cartridge shall contain a noncombustible gas under pressure in an amount appropriate for the proper discharge of the contents of the main canister. The cartridge shall have a clearly visible (when disassembled from unit) puncture seal to facilitate visual determination of cartridge condition (charged versus discharged). The pressure cartridge shall be designed for installation and removal by hand only without the need for tools. The pressure cartridge shall be provided with “left-hand” threads to prevent inadvertent installation of incorrect cartridges. Each pressure cartridge shall have the appropriate size designation clearly marked on the body of the cartridge. The pressure cartridge shall be enclosed and by a protective cover attached to the side of the main canister designed for easy removal.

c. Discharge Nozzle: Metal construction with access to internal discharge valve without the use of special tools. The nozzle shall be designed to provide “On/Off’” operation with little effort on the part of the operator, and designed and constructed to operate in all environments.

d. Discharge Hose: The discharge hose shall be constructed of long lasting rubber resistant to climatic conditions and retain flexibility to –40 deg. F (-40 deg. C). All couplings shall be of corrosion resistant metal.

e. Carrying Handle: Configuration of the handle shall be such that the angle of the unit while carried is appropriate for proper operation of the unit.

f. Actuating Mechanism: The actuating lever shall be designed to require only a single downward pushing action to activate the pressure cartridge. All internal working parts of cartridge puncture mechanism shall be of stainless steel.

g. Fill Cap: Corrosive resistant metal and externally threaded to adapt to main canister. The threads shall include machined grooves perpendicular to the threads to provide for release of internal pressure from the main canister during removal while at least two full threads are still fully engaged. The fill cap shall be designed to be installed and removed by hand only without need for tools.


1.1 Cabinet Type: Provide for 4.54 kg (10 lb.) extinguisher, suitable for fire extinguisher.

FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

1.2 Cabinet Construction: 1-hour fire rated.

1.3 Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

1.4 Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.


a. Trimless with Plaster Stop: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as plaster stop.

b. Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and finish as box overlaps surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door.

c. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend) of 6 to 8 mm.

1.5 Door Material: Steel sheet.

1.6 Door Style: Center glass panel with frame.

1.7 Door Glazing: Tempered float glass; bronze tint.

1.8 Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

a. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees.

1.9 Accessories:

a. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

b. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet.

c. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.

d. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

e. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by COR.

1) Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

f. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire-protection cabinet door is opened and that is powered by batteries or low voltage, complete with transformer.

1.10 Finishes:

a. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:

1) Exterior of cabinet door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.

2) Interior of cabinet and door.


b. Stainless Steel: Satin, reflective, directional polish, No. 7 .


1.1 Mounting Brackets: Provide for 9.07 kg (20 lb.) extinguishers, capable of supporting 15.88 kg (35 lb.)charged weight. Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

MOUNTING BRACKETS

1.2 Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by COR.

a. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.


1.1 Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth.

FABRICATION

a. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 1.1-mm- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 16-mm- thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

1.2 Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

a. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 13 mm thick.

b. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

1.3 Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

SCHEDULE 2 -


EXECUTION

1.1 Examine roughing-in for cabinets to verify actual locations before cabinet installation.

INSTALLATION

1.2 Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed.

1.3 Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.


1.4 Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

1.5 Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.

b. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. c. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and

plumb.

1.7 Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

1.8 Identification: Apply decals and vinyl lettering at locations indicated.

1.9 Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

1.10 Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair.



PART 2 -

PART 1 -

SECTION 10801 – TOILET, BATH AND CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES


GENERAL


SUMMARY

a. Toilet and bath accessories. b. Grab bars. c. Underlavatory guards. d. Custodial accessories. e. Pass-thru specimen turntable.


1.1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

SUBMITTALS

a. Construction details and dimensions. b. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other

work and substrate preparation. c. Material and finish descriptions. d. Features that will be included for Project. e. Manufacturer's warranty.

1.2 Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.

a. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

1.3 Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

a. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. b. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4 Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


1.1 Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.

QUALITY ASSURANCE




1.1 Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

COORDINATION

1.2 Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.


1.1 Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

WARRANTY

SCHEDULE 1 -


PRODUCTS

1.1 Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.8-mm minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

MATERIALS

1.2 Brass: ASTM B 19, ASTM B 16M, or ASTM B 30 castings.

1.3 Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M, 0.9-mm minimum nominal thickness.

1.4 Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180.

1.5 Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

1.6 Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating.

1.7 Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.

1.8 Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

1.9 Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.

1.10 Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to OBO's representative.



1.1 Paper Towel Dispenser:

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

a. Mounting: Recessed. b. Towel Type and Capacity: 400 single fold. c. Material: Stainless steel. d. Lockset: Tumbler type. e. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.

1.2 Toilet Tissue Dispenser: a. Mounting surface. b. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle

1.3 Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: a. Description: Double-roll dispenser. b. Mounting: Recessed. c. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle. d. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- 114- or 127-mm- diameter tissue rolls.

1.4 Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: a. Type: Recessed designed for a nominal 100-mm wall depth. b. Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels, verify type

with COR. c. Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 45.4 L. d. Accessories: Vinyl, reusable waste-receptacle liner tumbler locksets.

1.5 Liquid-Soap Dispenser: a. Mounting: Deck mounted on lavatory. b. Capacity: c. Stainless-Steel Soap Valve: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form. d. Lockset: Tumbler type. e. Refill Indicator: Window type.

1.6 Grab Bar: a. Material: Stainless steel, 1.3 mm thick. b. Mounting: Concealed. c. Gripping Surfaces: Slip-resistant texture. d. Outside Diameter: 32 mm for medium-duty applications or 38 mm for heavy-duty

applications.

1.7 Seat-Cover Dispenser: a. Mounting: Partition mounted, dual access. b. Capacity: c. Material: Stainless steel.


d. Lockset: Tumbler type.

1.8 Shelf Unit: a. Utility Shelf: 406-mm- long by 152-mm- deep shelf fabricated of minimum

nominal 1.3-mm- thick stainless steel, with exposed edges turned down not less than 12.7 mm and supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf's underside.

b. Fold-Down Purse Shelf: Fold-down hinged unit of chrome-plated cast-zinc alloy (zamac) with stippled finish on tray and bright chrome finish on edges, approximately 381 mm long by 140 mm wide, and with spring-loaded shelf that automatically returns to vertical position.

1.9 Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation. Both full-length and over-sink models.

a. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 1.3 mm thick. b. Size: As indicated on Drawings

1.10 Mirror Unit with Integral Shelf:

a. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch 1.3 mm thick.

1) Corners: Manufacturer's standard.

b. Integral Shelf: 5 inches 127 mm deep. c. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method

indicated below.

1) One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

2) Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

d. Size: As indicated on Drawings.


1.1 Shower Curtain Rod:

PRIVATE USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES

a. Stainless-steel shower curtain rod with 75-mm stainless-steel flanges designed for

exposed fasteners, in length required for shower opening indicated. 1) Provide shower curtain of semi-transparent vinyl with rod hooks and rings.

b. Type: Heavy-duty, 32-mm OD; fabricated from nominal 1.3-mm- thick stainless

steel.


1.2 Medicine Cabinet : a. Type: Recessed, for nominal 100-mm wall depth. b. Size: 460 by 610 or 430 by 685 mm. c. Construction: Stainless-steel cabinet. Mirror frame, door, hinge, and shelves of

stainless steel. d. Door: Framed mirror door concealing storage cabinet equipped and with

continuous hinge and spring-buffered, rod-type stop and magnetic door catch. e. Shelves: Three, adjustable.

1.3 Robe Hook :

a. Double-Prong Unit: Stainless-steel, double-prong robe hook with rectangular wall bracket and backplate for concealed mounting.

1.4 Towel Holder:

a. Towel Bar: 610-mm- long, stainless-steel, 19-mm- square tube with rectangular end brackets and galvanized steel backplates for concealed mounting.

b. Towel Ring: Stainless-steel pin projecting approximately 63 mm from wall with square or trapezoidal, stainless-steel ring that is approximately 6 mm in diameter, rectangular wall bracket, and backplate for concealed mounting.

1.5 Soap Dish:

a. Mounting: Surface mounted. b. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

1.6 Toothbrush and Tumbler Holder:

a. Mounting: Surface mounted. b. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

1.7 Bottle Opener:

a. Surface-Mounted Unit: Minimum nominal 1.3-mm- thick, stainless-steel bottle opener with bright finish.


1.1 Diaper-Changing Station:

CHILD CARE ACCESSORIES

a. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and

with child-protection strap.

1) Engineered to support a minimum of 250-lb (181-kg) static load when opened.

2) Body is 16 gage, 304 brushed stainless steel. 3) Insulate polystyrene replaceable tray liner.


4) Label: Easy to Read Instructional Labels. ANSI Z535.3 and ANSI Z535.4.

b. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches 100 mm from wall when closed or semirecessed, with unit projecting not more than 1 inches 25 mm from wall when closed. Selection as space allows.

c. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism.


1.1 Clinic Accessories: Specimen Pass Through Turntable by ASI, model #C515.

HEALTH CARE ACCESSORIES

a. 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel, satin finish. b. Turntable cylinder: 305mm (12 inch) diameter with 270 x 150 mm (10-1/2 x 6

inch) opening. c. Stainless steel self-lubricating ball bearing plate mounted on top and bottom. d. Positioned bullet catches for control of rotation. e. 1 inch wide trim. f. Cylinder lock for removal and sterilization

1.2 Folding Shower Seat:

a. Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access or triangular, corner-type seat.

b. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as selected by COR.

c. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). d. Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings.

1.3 Soap Dispenser: Soap dispenser shall be antibacterial-soap-resistant gray polymer with high-gloss finish on exposed surface. Lid shall pivot up from rear for top filling.

a. Operation: Push-in valve. b. Wall mounted.


1.1 Underlavatory Guard:

UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

a. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that

prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings.

b. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.


1.1 Toilet Brush: Wall mounted cabinet for brush.

CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES


a. Cabinet Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). b. Brush: Molded plastic with nylon or plastic bristles.

1.2 Utility Shelf:

a. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) and supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside.

b. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

1.3 Mop and Broom Holder:

a. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. b. Length: 36 inches (914 mm). c. Hooks: Three. d. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. e. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

1) Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel. 2) Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainless steel.

SCHEDULE 2 -


EXECUTION

1.1 Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

INSTALLATION

a. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 446.

1.2 Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.


1.1 Basis of Design: The following manufacturers have been established as the Basis of Design for the Work:

SCHEDULE

a. Toilet, Bath and Custodian Accessories:

1) Bobrick,

b. Diaper Changing Station:

1) Brocar Products, Cincinnati, Ohio.


2) Model: 100SSH

Item Name/Description

Bobrick Number Lavatory Mounted Soap Dispenser B-82276 SS

Soap Dispenser (Shop/Custodial) Soap Dispenser (Health Unit) Soap Dish B-4390 SS Partition-mounted Multi-Roll Toilet

Tissue Dispenser B-386 SS

Surface Mounted Multi-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser

B-2888 SS

Grab Bar B-5806 Series Tilt Channel Framed Mirror B-293 SS Mirror with Stainless Steel Angle Frame

and Shelf B-292 Series

Surface-Mounted Stainless Steel Shelf B-683 B-6837

Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle

B-3803 B-36903

Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser B-3803 SS B-359 B-35903

Surface-Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser B-262 Coat Hook with Bumpers B-212 SS Surface Mounted Towel Shelf with

Towel Bar B-676 SS

Recessed Napkin/Tampon Vendor B-3500x2 SS Recessed Toilet-Seat-Cover Dispenser B-3013 Surface-Mounted Toilet Seat Cover

Dispenser B-221

Recessed Sanitary Napkin Disposal

B-35303

Partition-Mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal

B-354

Sanitary Napkin Disposal B-3544 SS Hook Strip B-232 SS Bottle Opener B-203 Surface Mounted Toothbrush and

Tumbler Holder B-7679

Recessed Heavy-Duty Soap dish with Bar

B-4390

Stainless Steel Hook Strip (Custodial) B-232 Utility Shelf with Mop/Broom Holders B-224 Utility Shelf with Mop/Broom Holders B-239 Shelf with Hooks (Custodial or Shop) B-968 Soap Dispenser for Liquid Soaps and

Detergents (Custodial or Shop) B-42

Matrix Series Soap Dispenser for Antibacterial Soaps (Health Unit)

B-5090


Item Name/Description

Bobrick Number

PART 2 - SECTION 15110 - VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1 This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

a. Copper-alloy ball valves. b. Ferrous-alloy ball valves. c. Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves. d. Bronze check valves. e. Ferrous-alloy wafer check valves. f. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves. g. Chainwheel actuators.


a. Division 2 piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction piping.

b. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts. c. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and

actuators. d. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.


1.1 The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

a. CWP: Cold working pressure. b. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. c. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.


1.1 General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

1.2 Product data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.


1.3 Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer’s instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - QUALITY CONTROL

1.1 Install devices in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.


1.1 Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section “Materials and Equipment,” under “Source Limitations” Paragraph.

1.2 ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves and ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

a. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water piping valves unless referenced.

1.3 ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria.

1.4 MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.

1.5 NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


1.1 Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

a. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. b. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. c. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. d. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. e. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

1.2 Use the following precautions during storage:

a. Maintain valve end protection. b. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature.

If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

1.3 Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.



PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - VALVES, GENERAL

1.1 Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.

1.2 Bronze Valves: DN 50 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 Ferrous Valves: DN 65 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

1.5 Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

1.6 Valve Actuators:

a. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves DN 200 and larger. b. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. c. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves DN 150 and smaller, except plug valves.

1.7 Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.

1.8 Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

1.9 Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

1.10 Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES

1.1 Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.

1.2 Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with regular-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 4140-kPa minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - FERROUS-ALLOY BALL VALVES

1.1 Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-72, with flanged ends.

1.2 Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves: Class 150, full port.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - FERROUS-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES

1.1 Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.


1.2 Flangeless, 1035-kPa CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with two-piece stem.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - BRONZE CHECK VALVES

1.1 Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.

1.2 Type 4, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - FERROUS-ALLOY WAFER CHECK VALVES

1.1 Ferrous-Alloy Wafer Check Valves, General: API 594, spring loaded.

1.2 Dual-Plate, Class 125 or 150, Ferrous-Alloy, Wafer Check Valves: Flangeless body.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 6 - SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES

1.1 Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or alloy seat.

1.2 Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter matching companion flanges.

1.3 Type IV, Class 125, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and threaded ends.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - EXAMINATION

1.1 Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

a. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1.2 Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

1.3 Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

1.4 Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

1.5 Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

1.6 Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.



1.1 Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

a. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or plug valves. b. Throttling Service: Ball, butterfly, plug, or valves. c. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.

1.2 If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

1.3 Chilled-Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

a. Ball Valves, DN 50 and Smaller: Two-piece, 2760-kPa CWP rating, copper alloy. b. Ball Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. c. Butterfly Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Flangeless, 1035-kPa CWP rating, ferrous

alloy, with EPDM liner. d. Swing Check Valves, DN 50 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze. e. Swing Check Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron. f. Wafer Check Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Dual-plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150

ferrous alloy. g. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, DN 50 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 125

minimum. h. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Type I, Class 125,

cast iron.

1.4 Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

a. Ball Valves, DN 50 and Smaller: Two-piece, 2760-kPa CWP rating, copper alloy. b. Ball Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. c. Butterfly Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Flangeless, 1035-kPa CWP rating, ferrous

alloy, with EPDM liner. d. Swing Check Valves, DN 50 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze. e. Swing Check Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron. f. Wafer Check Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Single-plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150,

ferrous alloy. g. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, DN 50 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 125

minimum. h. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Type I, Class 125,

cast iron.

1.5 Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:

a. For Copper Tubing, DN 50 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends. b. For Copper Tubing, DN 65 to DN 100: Flanged ends. c. For Copper Tubing, DN 125 and Larger: Flanged ends. d. For Steel Piping, DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded ends. e. For Steel Piping, DN 65 to DN 100: Flanged ends. f. For Steel Piping, DN 125 and Larger: Flanged ends.



1.1 Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

1.2 Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

1.3 Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

1.4 Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

1.5 Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

1.6 Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

a. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. b. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. c. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - JOINT CONSTRUCTION

1.1 Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

1.2 Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - ADJUSTING

1.1 Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.



PART 2 - SECTION 15121 - PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1 This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping systems, and the following:

a. Metal-bellows expansion joints. b. Expansion compensators. c. Rubber expansion joints. d. Flexible-hose expansion joints. e. Slip expansion joints. f. Flexible ball joints. g. Pipe bends and loops. h. Guides and anchors.


1.1 BR: Butyl rubber.

1.2 Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

1.3 CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

1.4 CSM: Chlorosulfonyl-polyethylene rubber.

1.5 EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

1.6 NR: Natural rubber.

1.7 PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.


1.1 Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures.

1.2 Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.



1.1 Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.

1.2 Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

1.3 Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and design of expansion fittings and loops.

1.4 Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods of assembly.

1.5 Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.

1.6 Welding Certificates: Copies of certificate for welding procedures and personnel.

1.7 Schedule: Indicate manufacturer’s number, size, location, and features for each expansion fitting and loop.


1.1 Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of expansion fittings and loops that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

1.2 Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - EXPANSION JOINTS

1.1 Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1120, circular-corrugated-bellows type with external tie rods.

a. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Single- or multiple -ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper pipe end connections, and brass shrouds.

b. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single- or multiple-ply stainless-steel bellows, steel pipe end connections, and carbon-steel shroud.


c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa), unless otherwise indicated. d. Configuration: -bellows type with base, unless otherwise indicated.

1.2 Expansion Compensators: Double-ply corrugated steel, stainless-steel, or copper-alloy bellows in a housing with internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.

a. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa), unless otherwise indicated. b. Configuration for Copper Piping: Two-ply phosphor-bronze or stainless-steel

bellows and bronze or stainless-steel shroud. c. Configuration for Steel Piping: Two-ply stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel

shroud. d. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded. e. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded. f. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged.

1.3 Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced rubber with external control rods and complying with FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."

a. Spherical Type: Single spheres.

1) Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings: 1200 kPa At 116 deg C minimum.

b. Material: BR. c. End Connections: Full-faced, integral, steel flanges with steel retaining rings.

1.4 Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose; with inlet and outlet elbow fittings, corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.

a. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Copper-alloy fittings with solder- joint end connections.

1) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 3100 kPa at 21 deg C (450 psig at 70 deg F) and 2340 kPa at 232 deg C (340 psig at 450 deg F) ratings.

2) NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 2070 kPa at 21 deg C (300 psig at 70 deg F) and 1550 kPa at 232 deg C (225 psig at 450 deg F) ratings.

3) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 4830 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and 3450 kPa at 232 deg C (500 psig at 450 deg F) ratings.

4) NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 2890 kPa at 21 deg C (420 psig at 70 deg F) and 2170 kPa at 232 deg C (315 psig at 450 deg F) ratings.

b. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings with threaded end connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and flanged end connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.


1) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 3100 kPa at 21 deg C (450 psig at 70 deg F) and 2250kPa at 315 deg C (325 psig at 600 deg F) ratings.

2) NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150): Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1380 kPa at 21 deg C (200 psig at 70 deg F) and 1000 kPa at 315 deg C (145 psig at 600 deg F) ratings.

3) NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 860 kPa at 21 deg C (125 psig at 70 deg F) and 625 kPa at 315 deg C (90 psig at 600 deg F) ratings.

4) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 4830 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and 3550 kPa at 315 deg C (515 psig at 600 deg F) ratings.

5) NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150): Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1900 kPa at 21 deg C and (275 psig at 70 deg F) and 1380 kPa at 315 deg C (200 psig at 600 deg F) ratings.

6) NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1130 kPa at 21 deg C (165 psig at 70 deg F) and 830 kPa at 315 deg C (120 psig at 600 deg F) ratings.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - GUIDES

1.1 Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

1.1 Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1.2 Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.

1.3 Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

1.4 Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

1.5 Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened Portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.

b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless otherwise indicated.

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.


1.6 Concrete: Portland cement mix, 20.7 MPa minimum. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.

1.7 Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

a. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. b. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. c. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION

1.1 Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.2 Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.

1.3 Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

1.1 Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

1.2 Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.

a. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

b. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - SWING CONNECTIONS

1.1 Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - GUIDE INSTALLATION

1.1 Expansion loops or flexible pipe connections shall be guided to confine the degree of pipe movement.

1.2 Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - ANCHOR INSTALLATION


1.1 Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

1.2 Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

1.3 Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and include embedded fasteners.

1.4 Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written instructions if expansion fittings are indicated.

1.5 Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on or in concrete.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - PAINTING

1.1 Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

a. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.

1.2 Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



PART 2 - SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1 This Section includes domestic (potable) water piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment inside the building.


a. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings.

b. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.


1.1 Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.


1.1 Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Domestic Water Service Piping: 1100 kPa. b. Domestic Water Distribution Piping: 1035 kPa.


1.1 Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

1.2 Comply with ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” for materials, products and installation.

1.3 Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.

1.4 The distribution system shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of the International Plumbing Code.




1.1 Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

1.2 Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1.3 Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-type coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - STEEL PIPING

1.1 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40, galvanized. Include ends matching joining method.

a. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, galvanized, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.

b. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends.

c. Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern.

d. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125. e. Cast-Iron, Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125, galvanized. f. Steel-Piping, Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized, steel fitting with

telescoping body and slip-pipe section. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe sections, and flanged ends.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - DUCTILE-IRON PIPING

1.1 Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM A377/AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint, bell- and plain-spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

a. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron, standard pattern; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron, compact pattern.

1) Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

1.2 Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM A377/AWWA C151, with push-on-joint, bell- and plain-spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

a. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron, standard pattern; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron, compact pattern.

1) Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.


b. Ductile-Iron, Expansion Joints: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - COPPER TUBING

1.1 Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L (ASTM B 88M, Types A and B), water tube, annealed temper.

a. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

b. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.

c. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

1.2 Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L (ASTM B 88M, Types B and C), water tube, drawn temper.

a. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

b. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.

c. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - VALVES

1.1 Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves.

1.2 Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for balancing and drain valves.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - EXCAVATION

1.1 Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


1.1 Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.


1.2 Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 Underground Domestic Water Service Piping: Protect piping from exterior corrosion in accordance with AWWA Manual 27. Use the following piping materials for each size range:

a. DN 50 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type A; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. Underground installation of soft copper tubing is to be installed in building interior only.

b. DN 65 to DN 90: Soft copper tube, Type A; copper pressure fittings. Underground installation of soft copper tubing is to be installed in building interior only.

c. DN 100 to DN 200: Mechanical- or push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; mechanical- or push-on-joint, ductile-iron fittings; and restrained, gasketed joints.

d. DN 250 and DN 300: Mechanical- or push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; mechanical- or push-on-joint, ductile-iron fittings; and restrained, gasketed joints.

1.4 Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

a. DN 40 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type B; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

b. DN 50: Hard copper tube, Type B; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. c. DN 65 to DN 90: Hard copper tube, Type B; copper pressure fittings; and soldered

joints.


1.1 Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

a. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping DN 50 and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping DN 65 and larger.

b. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping DN 50 and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping DN 65 and larger.

c. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves. d. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - PIPING INSTALLATION

1.1 Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

1.2 Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

1.3 Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."


1.4 Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

1.5 Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages," and drain valves and strainers are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

1.6 Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Water-pressure regulators are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

1.7 Install domestic water piping level and plumb.

1.8 If water treatment is to be done within the building or if no water treatment is required, extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes and locations indicated. If water treatment is to be done remotely on-site outside the building, extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping connecting building domestic water service with remote water treatment in sizes and locations indicated.

1.9 Extend domestic water service to all plumbing fixtures supplying water for drinking, culinary use, or processing food.

1.10 Extend domestic water service to domestic hot water. Domestic hot water shall be supplied to all plumbing fixtures and equipment used for building maintenance, food preparation, and dishwashing.

1.11 Install underground ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to water service piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.

1.12 Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

1.13 Perform the following steps before operation:

a. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. b. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. c. Open throttling valves to proper setting. d. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing

of piping during installation. e. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. f. Remove filter cartridges from housings, and verify that cartridges are as specified

for application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.

1.14 Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water.

1.15 Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.


a. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 550 kPa maximum, unless otherwise indicated.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION

1.16 Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

1.17 Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.


1.1 Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment. Use ball valves for piping DN 50 and smaller. Use butterfly valves for piping DN 65 and larger.

1.2 Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops. Use ball valves for piping DN 50 and smaller. Use butterfly valves for piping DN 65 and larger.

1.3 Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

a. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. b. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

1.1 Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:

a. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. b. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

1) 30 m and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 2) Longer Than 30 m: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. 3) Longer Than 30 m, if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

c. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 30 m or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

d. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

1.2 Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

1.3 Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

1.4 Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 10 mm.


1.5 Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

a. DN 100 and DN 125: 3.7 m with 16-mm rod. b. DN 150: 3.7 m with 19-mm rod. c. DN 200 to DN 300: 3.7 m with 22-mm rod.

1.6 Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

a. DN 20 and Smaller: 1500 mm with 10-mm rod. b. DN 25 and DN 32: 1800 mm with 10-mm rod. c. DN 40 and DN 50: 2400 mm with 10-mm rod. d. DN 65: 2700 mm with 13-mm rod. e. DN 80 to DN 90: 3 m with 13-mm rod.

1.7 Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 3 m.

1.8 Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.


1.1 Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

1.2 Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

1.3 Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

1.4 Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following:

a. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

b. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."

c. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for DN 65 and larger.


1.1 Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.2 Test domestic water piping as follows:

a. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Tests are to witnessed by the government

b. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

c. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 150 percent of operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. This test pressure is to be maintained for a period of at least 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

d. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

e. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 8 - ADJUSTING

1.1 Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 9 - CLEANING

1.1 Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

a. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

b. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:


1) Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

2) Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

a) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 mg/L of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

b) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 mg/L of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

3) Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

4) Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

1.2 Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

1.3 Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.



PART 2 - SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1 This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.


a. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints" for isolation pads, spring isolators, and seismic restraints.

b. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for control devices not packaged with units.


1.1 Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.

1.2 Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

1.3 Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts consisting of units of sections of units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory applied color finishes.

1.4 Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

1.5 Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.6 LEED Submittals:

a. Credit EA 4: Manufacturers' product data for refrigerants, including printed statement that refrigerants are free of HCFCs.


1.1 Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."



1.3 Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-1999 "Energy efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - COORDINATION

1.1 Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.2 Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - WARRANTY

1.1 General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Government of other rights Government may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.2 Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1.3 Warranty Period: The compressor shall have minimum five years warranty from date of substantial completion.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 5 - EXTRA MATERIALS

1.1 Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

a. Filters: One set of filters for each unit. b. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - CEILING-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

1.1 Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Contracting Agent, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.


1.2 Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

1.3 Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection.

1.4 Fan: Centrifugal fan, with power-induced outside air, and integral condensate pump.

1.5 Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

a. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

1.6 Filters: Permanent, cleanable.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS

1.1 Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

1.2 Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

a. Compressor Type: Reciprocating or Scroll. b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and

automatic-reset low-pressure switch.

1.3 Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded copper fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

1.4 Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.

1.5 Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

1.6 Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

1.7 Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 7 deg C.

1.8 Mounting Base: Polyethylene.


1.1 Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features:


a. Compressor time delay. b. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. c. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,

operating mode, and fan speed. d. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.

1.2 Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

1.3 Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - INSTALLATION

1.1 Install units level and plumb.

1.2 Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

1.3 Install roof-mounted compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

1.4 Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of 25 mm. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

1.5 Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.


1.1 Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

a. Water Coil Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section

"Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.

b. Remote Water-Cooled Condenser Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.

c. Steam Coil Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Steam and Condensate Piping." Connect to steam piping with shutoff valve and


union or flange; for condensate piping, starting from the coil connection, connect with union or flange, strainer, trap, and shutoff valve.

1.2 Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

1.3 Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

1.4 Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

1.5 Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.


1.1 Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections, and to prepare a written report of inspection.

1.2 Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

1.3 Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and retest.

1.4 Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

1.5 STARTUP SERVICE

1.6 Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

1.7 Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.

1.8 Perform startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions and do the following:

a. Fill out manufacturer’s checklists. b. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils. c. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device. d. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration

transmission to structure.


PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - DEMONSTRATION

1.1 Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Government maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.

a. Train Government’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.

b. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."

c. Schedule training with COR with at least seven days' advance notice.



PART 2 - SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters, and integral surge suppression units.

2. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches. 3. Device wall plates. 4. Floor service outlets and multi-outlet assemblies.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

D. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Government-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.


1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRING DEVICES, GENERAL

A. Wiring Devices: Provide U.S. NEMA type wiring devices and associated devices, boxes, and covers in the CAA. Outside the CAA all wiring devices shall be the U.S. NEMA type, however with the written approval of DE/EEB, exceptions may be made to use local devices. Receptacles other than 120-volt or 220-volt general-purpose convenience outlets shall be marked on the cover plates with voltage, amperage, phase, and frequency. Matching plugs shall be provided.

B. Wire and Cable: Select types of insulation according to the application. See the NEC for insulation types, operating temperatures, ambient temperature, and voltage classes. Cable and wire sizes, types, and insulation shall be properly specified by the A/E using U.S. standards in order to obtain the highest quality transmission for security, data, and other signal cables. Provide solid conductors for conductors sized 6.0 mm2 and smaller. Provide stranded conductors for conductors sized 10 mm2 and larger. Provide copper branch circuits and feeder conductors sized at 125 percent of full load capacity. Use full-sized neutral conductor and a separate ground conductor for each circuit. Circuits and feeders that supply power for electronic equipment may require an oversized neutral to compensate for high harmonic neutral currents. Such feeders must be identified in the design and the neutral increased to a minimum of two times full rated size. Non-metallic sheathed cable (“Romex”) is prohibited, and armored or metal clad cable, Types AC or MC is prohibited except as permitted in limited applications by DE/EEB.

C. Overload Protection: Copper conductors shall be provided overload protection in accordance with NEC Table 310-6. Overload protection shall not exceed 15A for 2.5 mm2 conductors, 20A for 4.0 mm2 conductors or 30A for 6.0 mm2 conductors.

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Receptacles, General: General-purpose receptacles shall be installed on 15 and 20-amp branch circuits, and shall be of the grounding type with effective grounding contacts. NEMA type receptacles shall be used in all spaces. A mix of NEMA type receptacles and local standard receptacles may be used in non-CAA spaces with the approval of DE/EEB. Local standard receptacles may be rated 220V, 13A or 16A. Flexible arrangements, such as for floor outlets or cable trays in office areas shall be provided to allow for partition rearrangement. An underfloor duct system shall not be used except where specifically requested by OBO. G.F.C.I. protection shall be provided for receptacles in bathrooms, kitchen, other wet areas and outdoors per NEC requirements. Where 220V circuits are used, G.F.C.I. circuit breakers may be required in lieu of protection at the receptacle.

B. Straight-Blade and Twist Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade. NEMA 6-20R for 220 or 240V applications.


C. GFCI Receptacles Shall not be used. Outlets designated for GFCI protection shall be fed from a GFCI circuit breaker. One GFCI breaker, rated for 10mA ground fault trip, 50Hz, 240V (line to ground) shall be installed in an enclosure adjacent to the first receptacle in the branch circuit. This breaker will provide ground fault protection for all receptacles in the circuit.

D. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20.

E. Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type.

F. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.

1. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching to suit connections.

2. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

G. Provide one 20 A and one 15 A cord plug cap for each duplex receptacle, Hubbell HBL5466C or equal, and two of each for each quadraplex receptacle. Plug caps shall be of the grounding type, utilizing only screw terminals for terminating conductors.

2.3 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 1-mm- thick, brushed stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel

2.4 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Power Receptacle: NEMA , Configuration 6-20R, unless otherwise indicated. Colors to match interior color scheme approved by the Project Director.

C. Signal Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening, unless otherwise indicated.


2.5 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES

A. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

B. Wire: 4.0 mm2.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Color:

1. All device faceplate shall have brushed stainless steel finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.

B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates where possible.

E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.

F. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

2. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.


3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.

2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
